summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/68944-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/68944-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--old/68944-0.txt8246
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8246 deletions
diff --git a/old/68944-0.txt b/old/68944-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 796bd42..0000000
--- a/old/68944-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8246 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of Lost on the Orinoco, by Edward
-Stratemeyer
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: Lost on the Orinoco
- American boys in Venezuela
-
-Author: Edward Stratemeyer
-
-Illustrator: A. B. Shute
-
-Release Date: September 9, 2022 [eBook #68944]
-
-Language: English
-
-Produced by: David Edwards, David E. Brown, and the Online Distributed
- Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This book was
- produced from images made available by the HathiTrust
- Digital Library.)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LOST ON THE ORINOCO ***
-
-
-
-
-
-EDWARD STRATEMEYER’S BOOKS
-
-
-Old Glory Series
-
-_Six Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25._
-
- UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA.
- A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA.
- FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS.
- UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES.
- THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE.
- UNDER MACARTHUR IN LUZON.
-
-
-Bound to Succeed Series
-
-_Three Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.00._
-
- RICHARD DARE’S VENTURE. OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH.
- TO ALASKA FOR GOLD.
-
-
-Ship and Shore Series
-
-_Three Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.00._
-
- THE LAST CRUISE OF THE SPITFIRE. TRUE TO HIMSELF.
- REUBEN STONE’S DISCOVERY.
-
-
-War and Adventure Stories
-
-_Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25._
-
- ON TO PEKIN. BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON.
-
-
-Colonial Series
-
-_Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25._
-
- WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST; Or, A Soldier Boy’s Battles in the
- Wilderness.
-
- MARCHING ON NIAGARA; Or, The Soldier Boy of the Old Frontier.
-
-
-American Boys’ Biographical Series
-
-_Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25._
-
-AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY.
-
-_Another volume in preparation._
-
-
-Pan-American Series
-
-_Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.00, net._
-
-LOST ON THE ORINOCO.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration: Over it went, carrying the boys with it.]
-
-
-
-
- Pan-American Series
-
- LOST ON THE ORINOCO
- OR
- AMERICAN BOYS IN VENEZUELA
-
- BY
- EDWARD STRATEMEYER
-
- Author of “With Washington in the West,” “American Boys’ Life of
- William McKinley,” “On to Pekin,” “Between Boer and Briton,”
- “Old Glory Series,” “Ship and Shore Series,”
- “Bound to Succeed Series,” etc.
-
- _ILLUSTRATED BY A. B. SHUTE_
-
- BOSTON
- LEE AND SHEPARD
- 1902
-
-
-
-
- Published in March, 1902
-
- COPYRIGHT, 1902, BY LEE AND SHEPARD
-
- _All rights reserved_
-
- LOST ON THE ORINOCO
-
- Norwood Press
- BERWICK & SMITH
- Norwood, Mass.
- U. S. A.
-
-
-
-
-PREFACE
-
-
-“Lost on the Orinoco” is a complete tale in itself, but forms the
-first volume of the “Pan-American Series,” a line of books intended to
-embrace sight seeing and adventures in different portions of the three
-Americas, especially such portions as lie outside of the United States.
-
-The writing of this series has been in the author’s mind for several
-years, for it seemed to him that here were many fields but little known
-and yet well worthy the attention of young people, and especially young
-men who in business matters may have to look beyond our own States for
-their opportunities. The great Pan-American Exhibition at Buffalo,
-N. Y. did much to open the eyes of many regarding Central and South
-America, but this exposition, large as it was, did not tell a hundredth
-part of the story. As one gentleman having a Venezuelan exhibit there
-expressed it: “To show up Venezuela properly, we should have to bring
-half of the Republic here.” And what is true of Venezuela is true of
-all the other countries.
-
-In this story are related the sight seeing and adventures of five
-wide-awake American lads who visit Venezuela in company with their
-academy professor, a teacher who had in former years been a great
-traveler and hunter. The party sail from New York to La Guayra, visit
-Caracas, the capital, Macuto, the fashionable seaside resort, and
-other points of interest near by; then journey westward to the Gulf
-of Maracaibo and the immense lake of the same name; and at last find
-themselves on the waters of the mighty Orinoco, the second largest
-stream in South America, a body of water which maintains a width of
-three miles at a distance of over 600 miles from the ocean. Coffee and
-cocoa plantations are visited, as well as the wonderful gold and silver
-mines and the great _llanos_, or prairies, and the boys find time
-hanging anything but heavy on their hands. Occasionally they get into a
-difficulty of more or less importance, but in the end all goes well.
-
-In the preparation of the historical portions of this book the very
-latest American, British and Spanish authorities have been consulted.
-Concerning the coffee, mining and other industries most of the
-information has come from those directly interested in these branches.
-This being so, it is hoped that the work will be found accurate and
-reliable as well as interesting.
-
-Once more thanking the thousands who have read my previous books for
-the interest they have shown, I place this volume in their hands
-trusting it will fulfil their every expectation.
-
- EDWARD STRATEMEYER.
- April 1, 1902.
-
-
-
-CONTENTS
-
-
- CHAPTER PAGE
-
- I. THE BOYS TALK IT OVER 1
-
- II. PREPARING FOR THE START 11
-
- III. ON BOARD THE STEAMER 21
-
- IV. VENEZUELA, PAST AND PRESENT 33
-
- V. HOCKLEY MAKES A BOSOM FRIEND 42
-
- VI. A PLAN THAT FAILED 54
-
- VII. FROM CURAÇAO TO LA GUAYRA 63
-
- VIII. ON A CLIFF AND UNDER 73
-
- IX. HOCKLEY SHOWS HIS TRUE COLORS 81
-
- X. ON MULE BACK INTO CARACAS 90
-
- XI. THE PROFESSOR MEETS AN OLD FRIEND 100
-
- XII. MARKEL AGAIN TO THE FRONT 109
-
- XIII. A PLANTATION HOME IN VENEZUELA 119
-
- XIV. A LOSS OF HONOR AND MONEY 131
-
- XV. SOMETHING ABOUT COFFEE GROWING 143
-
- XVI. DARRY’S WILD RIDE 151
-
- XVII. A TALK ABOUT BEASTS AND SNAKES 159
-
- XVIII. A BITTER DISCOVERY 168
-
- XIX. BATHING AT MACUTO 177
-
- XX. A SHORT VOYAGE WESTWARD 186
-
- XXI. THE SQUALL ON LAKE MARACAIBO 196
-
- XXII. PORT OF THE HAIR 205
-
- XXIII. A STOP AT TRINIDAD 214
-
- XXIV. UP THE RIVER TO BOLIVAR 224
-
- XXV. SOMETHING ABOUT COCOA AND CHOCOLATE 234
-
- XXVI. CAMPING ON THE UPPER ORINOCO 242
-
- XXVII. BRINGING DOWN AN OCELOT 251
-
- XXVIII. MONKEYS AND A CANOE 261
-
- XXIX. LOST ON THE ORINOCO 270
-
- XXX. IN THE DEPTHS OF THE JUNGLE 279
-
- XXXI. HOCKLEY AND THE BOA-CONSTRICTOR 287
-
- XXXII. A PEEP AT GOLD AND SILVER MINES 296
-
- XXXIII. TOGETHER AGAIN--CONCLUSION 304
-
-
-
-
-ILLUSTRATIONS
-
-
- “Over it went, carrying the boys with it” (p. 297) _Frontispiece_
-
- PAGE
-
- “Stay where you are!” 47
-
- A big mass of dirt came down 80
-
- “I’ve got it,” he muttered 142
-
- “You have some baggage, that bag. I shall hold it.” 173
-
- “I heard something, what was it?” 203
-
- “Take it off, do!” 249
-
- “Help! Save me!” screamed the unfortunate youth 291
-
-
-
-
-LOST ON THE ORINOCO
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER I
-
-THE BOYS TALK IT OVER
-
-
-“Hurrah, Mark, it’s settled at last.”
-
-“What is settled, Frank?”
-
-“We are to go to Venezuela and other places in South America. My father
-just got the word from Professor Strong. I brought the letter along for
-you to read.”
-
-“That’s certainly immense news,” remarked Mark Robertson, as he took
-the letter which Frank Newton held out to him. “Does he say how soon he
-will be able to start?”
-
-“Just as soon as he can settle up affairs at Lakeview Academy. I
-suppose he’s got quite something to do there yet. But we can hurry him
-along, can’t we?”
-
-“I don’t think you’ll hurry the professor much,” answered Mark, as he
-began to read the communication which had been passed to him. “He’s
-one of the kind that is slow but sure--not but that he can move quick
-enough, when you least expect it.”
-
-“As for instance on the night we tried to hide all the schoolbooks in
-the old boathouse,” responded Frank, with a twinkle in his eye. “He
-caught us neatly, didn’t he?”
-
-“That’s what. Hullo! So Beans and Darry are going, too. I like that
-first rate. Beans is all right, even if he is from Boston, and Darry
-will furnish fun enough for a minstrel show.”
-
-“To be sure. I wouldn’t want to go if they weren’t along, and you. But
-do you see what the professor says on the last page? He wants to take
-Jake the Glum along too.”
-
-At this the face of Mark Robinson fell somewhat. “I wish he had left
-Glummy out,” he said. “He knows the fellow is sour to the last degree
-and a bully in the bargain.”
-
-“I guess the professor wants to reform him, Mark.”
-
-“He’ll have up-hill work doing it. Glummy has been at the academy two
-years and I know him pretty thoroughly.”
-
-“Well, he’ll be the richest boy in the crowd. Perhaps that had
-something to do with taking him along.”
-
-“No, the professor doesn’t think so much of money as that. Each person
-in the crowd will have to pay his share of the expenses and his share
-of the professor’s salary, and that’s all, outside of the incidentals.”
-
-“I wonder if the incidentals won’t be rather high.”
-
-“I fancy we can make them as high as we please--buying souvenirs and
-things like that. You can be sure Glummy will try his best to cut a
-wide swath if he gets the chance.”
-
-“Perhaps the professor will hold him in. But it’s great news, isn’t
-it?” And in his enthusiasm Frank began to dance an impromptu jig on the
-library floor.
-
-Frank Newton was a New York city youth, sixteen years of age,
-tall, well-built and rather good looking. He was the only son of a
-Wall Street banker, and if his parent was not a millionaire he was
-exceedingly well to do. The lad resided in the fashionable part of
-Madison Avenue when at home, which was not often, for his family were
-fond of going abroad, and either took the boy with them or sent him to
-boarding school.
-
-Directly opposite the home of the Newtons lived the Robertson family,
-consisting of Mr. and Mrs. Robertson, Mark, and several smaller
-children. Mr. Robertson was a dry goods importer who owned an interest
-in several mills in England and Scotland, and he made trips across the
-Atlantic semi-yearly.
-
-Although Mark Robertson was a year older than Frank Newton, the two
-lads were warm friends and had gone to school together for years. Their
-earlier education had been had in the city, but when Frank was eleven
-and Mark twelve both had been packed off to Lakeview Academy, a small
-but well conducted school nestling among the hills of New Hampshire.
-
-Five years of life at the academy had made the place seem like a second
-home to the boys. The master, Professor Amos Strong, was a thorough
-gentleman and scholar, and under his guidance the boys progressed
-rapidly in all their studies. The professor had in his day been both a
-traveler and hunter, and the stories he was wont to relate during off
-hours were fascinating to the last degree.
-
-As might be expected, the boys, while at school, made many friends
-and also an enemy or two, although as regards the latter, the enmity
-was never very deep, for Professor Strong would not tolerate anything
-underhanded or sneakish.
-
-Next to Mark, Frank’s dearest chum at the academy was Dartworth Crane,
-a slightly built boy of fifteen, who was as full of fun as a boy can
-well be. Dartworth, or “Darry” as he was always called for short, was
-the son of a rich Chicago cattle dealer, and the boy’s earlier days had
-been spent on a ranch in Montana. He loved to race on horseback and
-hunt and fish, and the master sometimes had all he could do to hold the
-sunny but impetuous lad within proper bounds.
-
-As Frank had another chum, so did Mark, in the person of Samuel
-Winthrop, the son of a well-to-do widow who resided in the Back Bay
-district of Boston. Samuel was a tall, studious looking individual,
-with a high forehead and a thick mass of curly black hair. Because he
-came from Boston, he had been nick-named “Beans,” and although he did
-not relish the _sobriquet_ it was likely to stick to him for years to
-come.
-
-Among the lads to join those at the academy two years before had been
-Jacob Hockley, a thin, lank youth of Mark’s age, with a white freckled
-face and hair strongly inclined to be red. Hockley was the only son
-and heir of a millionaire lumber dealer of Pennsylvania. His manner
-was peculiar, at times exceedingly “bossy” as the others declared, and
-then again morose and sour, the latter mood having won for him the
-nickname of “Glummy” or “Jake the Glum.” Hockley was given to spending
-his money, of which he had more than was good for him, freely, but even
-this had failed to make him any substantial friends.
-
-The enmity between Hockley on one side, and Frank and Mark on the
-other, had arisen over the captaincy of the academy baseball team the
-summer previous. Jake wished to be the captain of the team, and had
-done his best to persuade or buy the boys over to vote for him. But
-Frank had advocated Mark for the captaincy, and Mark had won, much to
-the lank youth’s discomfiture.
-
-“You’ll never win a game with Mark Robertson as captain and with Frank
-Newton on first-base,” had been Jake’s sour comment, but he was sadly
-mistaken. That summer the team played nine games with the teams from
-rival schools, and won seven of the contests. The winning made Jake
-Hockley more down on Mark and Frank than ever, but as the others were
-popular he had often to conceal his real feelings.
-
-On a windy night in June the cry of “fire!” had aroused every inmate
-of Lakeview Academy from his bed, and had caused all to leave the
-rambling building in a hurry. The conflagration had started in the
-laundry, and from this room quickly communicated to the kitchen, dining
-hall, and then the remainder of the stone and wood structure. In such
-a high wind, the fire department from the village, two miles away,
-could do little or nothing, and the efforts of the students, headed by
-the several teachers, were likewise of no avail. Inside of three hours
-everything was swept away and only a cellar full of blackened debris
-marked the spot where the picturesque academy had once stood.
-
-Under such circumstances many a man would have been too stunned to act
-immediately, but ere the stones of the building were cold, Professor
-Strong was laying his plans with the insurance companies for the
-erection of a new and better structure. The students were cared for at
-some neighboring houses and then refitted with clothing and sent home.
-
-During the fall there had been much talk of a personally conducted
-tour to South America during the coming year, the tour to be under the
-guidance of Professor Strong, who had been South a number of times
-before. Letters had been sent to the parents of various students, but
-nothing definite had been done up to the time the fire occurred.
-
-Mark and Frank had planned for the trip South, and could not bear
-to think of giving it up, and as soon as Professor Strong was in a
-position to give them his attention, Frank had gotten his father to
-write concerning it. Several letters passed, and at last Professor
-Strong decided to leave the building and the management of the new
-academy to his brother, who had just left the faculty of Harvard, and
-go with the boys.
-
-While the trip was being talked of at the academy, previous to the
-fire, Jake Hockley had announced his determination to go, but since
-the boys had separated, nothing more had been heard from the lank
-youth, and Mark and Frank were hoping he had given the plan up. The
-announcement therefore, that he would make one of the party, put a
-damper on their enthusiasm.
-
-“He’ll get us into some kind of trouble before we get back, you see if
-he doesn’t,” was Frank’s comment.
-
-“I’ll make him keep his distance,” was Mark’s reply. “If he attempts to
-go too far I’ll show him that I won’t stand any nonsense.”
-
-The party of six were to leave for Venezuela by way of New York city,
-and a few days after the conversation just recorded Sam Winthrop came
-down on the train from Boston, to remain with Mark until the arrival of
-the professor.
-
-“Beans, by all that’s delightful!” cried Mark, as he wrung his friend’s
-hand. “So glad you came a few days ahead.”
-
-“I wanted a chance to look around New York,” answered Sam Winthrop.
-“I’ve never had a chance before, you know.”
-
-“You shall look around, all you please, and Frank and I will go with
-you.”
-
-“Is Darry here yet?”
-
-“No, but Frank expects him to-morrow. Then we can all go around until
-Professor Strong arrives. But say, what do you think about Glummy
-going?” and Mark looked anxious.
-
-“Can’t say that I am overjoyed, Mark.”
-
-“I wish it was anybody but Hockley--and Frank wishes the same.”
-
-“Well, all arrangements have been made, so we’ll have to make the best
-of it. But I heard one thing that doesn’t please me,” went on Sam. “I
-got a letter from Dick Mason, and in it he said Glummy was talking of
-the trip to some of his chums, and said he was going just to show Frank
-and you a thing or two.”
-
-“Did he? I wonder what he meant?”
-
-“He didn’t mean anything very good, you can be sure of that, Mark.”
-
-“You are right. We’ll certainly have to keep our eyes open and watch
-him,” concluded Mark, seriously.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER II
-
-PREPARING FOR THE START
-
-
-On the following morning Darry Crane came in, on the Limited Express
-direct from Chicago. He sent a telegram ahead, to Frank, who went up to
-the Grand Central depot to meet his chum.
-
-“Had a fine trip,” said Darry, “but, honest, I couldn’t get here fast
-enough, I’ve been that anxious to see you. Heard from Beans yet? I’ll
-wager he comes down with his grip loaded with beans, on account of the
-long trip, you know. What, didn’t bring any beans? Must be a mistake
-about that.”
-
-“I guess he was afraid you’d forget the pork,” answered Frank, with a
-laugh. “But how have you been since you left school?”
-
-“First-class. Went West, you know, with my father and nearly rode a
-pony to death on the Lone Star ranch. Oh, it was glorious to get over
-the ground. Beats a stuffy old city all to bits. Hold on, I’ve got to
-look after my trunk. Wouldn’t want to lose that, for it’s got the
-whole outfit for the trip in it.”
-
-“Our man will have the trunk brought to our house,” answered Frank.
-“You come with me, and I’ll take you down to Mark’s, where you’ll find
-Beans. By the way, heard anything of Glummy?”
-
-“Did I? Well, I just guess, Frank. What do you think? He actually paid
-me a visit--not very long, of course, but still he came to see me. Said
-he was passing through Chicago on a trip to St. Louis, and felt that he
-had to hunt up an old chum. I almost fainted when he said it. But he
-acted quite decent, I must admit, not a bit airish or sour either.”
-
-“Did he say anything about this trip to South America?”
-
-“Not much, excepting that he would like to go if it went through. I
-didn’t say much either, for I was thinking you and Mark wouldn’t like
-to have him along. You don’t, do you?”
-
-“Not much, although I guess we can stand it if he lets us alone. We
-needn’t have much to do with him.”
-
-Taking Darry’s valise from him, Frank led the way to the street and
-hailed a passing auto-cab, and both were speedily taken to the home on
-Madison Avenue. A few minutes later they hurried across the way and
-joined Mark and Sam.
-
-In anticipation of the good times ahead, all four of the lads were in a
-happy frame of mind, and the remainder of the day was spent by the New
-Yorkers in showing the visitors around Central Park and other points
-of interest. In the afternoon the four went downtown and crossed the
-Brooklyn Bridge. Then they came back to the Battery and took the little
-craft which plies hourly between that point and Bedloe’s Island, where
-is located the Statue of Liberty, standing as a gigantic sentinel to
-New York Bay.
-
-“How big it looks when one is close to it,” remarked Sam, when they
-disembarked close to the base of the statue. “I thought climbing to the
-top would be easy, but I fancy it’s going to be as tedious as climbing
-to the top of Bunker Hill monument.”
-
-And so it proved, as they went up the dark and narrow circular steps
-leading to the crown of the statue. They wished to go up into the
-torch, but the way was blocked owing to repairs.
-
-Suddenly Mark, on looking around him, uttered an exclamation of
-surprise. “Glummy Hockley! How did you get here?”
-
-His words caused the others to forget their sight seeing for the
-moment, and they faced about, to find themselves confronted by the
-freckled-faced youth, who had been gazing in the opposite direction.
-
-“I’ll thank you not to call me ‘Glummy,’” said Hockley, coolly,
-although he too was taken by surprise. Then he turned to Darry. “How do
-you do, Darry? When did you arrive?”
-
-Mark bit his lip and looked at Frank, who gave him a knowing look in
-return. Clearly it had been an ill beginning to the conversation.
-Somehow Mark felt as if he had not done just right.
-
-“Excuse me, Glum--I mean Hockley, I’ll try to remember your proper name
-after this,” he stammered.
-
-“I don’t mind those things at school, but you must remember we are
-not at school now,” went on Hockley, with something of an air of
-importance. Then he smiled faintly at Sam. “How are you, Beans?”
-
-“Excuse me, but we are not at school now, and my name’s not ‘Beans,’”
-was the dry response.
-
-There was a second of silence, and then Darry burst into a roar of
-laughter, and Frank and Mark were compelled to follow, the whole thing
-seemed so comical. Hockley grew red, but when Sam joined in the
-merriment he felt compelled to smile himself, although he looked more
-sour than ever directly afterward.
-
-“All right, Sam, I’ll try to remember,” he said with an effort, and
-held out his hand.
-
-The two shook hands and then the lank youth shook hands with Darry.
-After this there was nothing to do but for Frank and Mark to take
-Hockley’s hand also, and this they did, although stiffly.
-
-But the ice was broken and soon all were talking as a crowd of boys
-usually do. Hockley had brought a field glass with him and insisted on
-all using it.
-
-“Bought it down in Maiden Lane this morning,” he remarked. “Got the
-address of a first-class firm from a friend who knows all about such
-things. It cost me sixty-five dollars, but I reckon it’s worth it.
-Ain’t many better glasses around. I expect it will be just the thing in
-Venezuela.”
-
-“No doubt,” said Darry, but felt somewhat disgusted over Hockley’s air
-of importance. Nevertheless, the glass was a fine one, and everybody
-enjoyed looking through it. Ships coming up the Lower Bay could be seen
-at a long distance, and they could also see over Brooklyn and Long
-Island, and over Jersey City and Newark to the Orange Mountains.
-
-“What are you fellows going to do to-night?” questioned Hockley, when
-they were going down the stairs again.
-
-“We thought something of going to Manhattan Beach to see the
-fireworks----” began Frank, and broke off short.
-
-“I was thinking of going to Coney Island,” went on the lank youth.
-“Supposing we all go there? I’ll foot the bill.”
-
-“I shouldn’t care to go to Coney Island, and I don’t think Darry and
-Sam will care either,” said Mark.
-
-“Let us all go to Manhattan,” broke in Sam. “I’ve often heard of the
-fireworks.” He had not the heart to give Hockley too much of a cold
-shoulder.
-
-So it was arranged, on the way back to the Battery, and then there was
-nothing to do but ask the lank youth to dine with them.
-
-“We are bound to have Glummy on us, sooner or later,” whispered Mark
-to Frank, while they were eating. “Perhaps it’s just as well to make
-the best of it. It will be time enough to turn on him when he does
-something which is openly offensive.”
-
-When it came time to settle the bill, the lank youth wished to pay for
-everybody, but the others would not allow this.
-
-“Let everybody pay for himself,” said Darry. “Then there won’t be any
-trouble.”
-
-“I can pay as well as not,” said Hockley, sourly.
-
-“So can any of us,” returned Mark, dryly; and there the subject dropped.
-
-The trip to Manhattan Beach and the fireworks were very enjoyable, and
-before the evening came to an end everybody was in a much better humor,
-although both Mark and Frank felt that they would have enjoyed the trip
-more had Hockley not been present.
-
-Hockley was stopping at the Astor House, and left them near the
-entrance to the Brooklyn Bridge. He had wanted them to have a late
-supper with him, and had even mentioned wine, but all had declined,
-stating they were tired and wished to go to bed.
-
-“He must be getting to be a regular high-flyer if he uses much wine,”
-remarked Frank when the four were on their way uptown. “What a fool he
-is with his money. He thinks that covers everything.”
-
-“He’ll be foolish to take to drink,” returned Darry. “It has ruined
-many a rich young fellow, and he ought to know it.”
-
-“I think Hockley would be all right if it wasn’t for the high opinion
-he has of himself,” came from Sam. “But his patronizing way of talking
-is what irritates. He considers nobody as important as himself. In one
-way I think he’d be better off if he was poor.”
-
-“The family haven’t been rich very long--only eight or ten years, so
-I’ve heard,” said Mark. “Poor Hockley isn’t used to it yet. It will be
-a lesson to him to learn that there are lots of other rich folks in
-this world who aren’t making any fuss and feathers about it.”
-
-In the morning came a message from Professor Strong, stating that he
-had arrived, and was stopping at the Hotel Manhattan. He added that he
-would see Mr. Robertson and Mr. Newton that morning, and would be at
-the service of the boys directly after lunch.
-
-“Now we won’t lose much more time,” cried Frank. “I declare I wish we
-were to sail for Venezuela to-day.”
-
-“I fancy the professor has a good many arrangements to make,” said
-Sam. “It’s quite a trip we are contemplating, remember.”
-
-“Pooh! it’s not such a trip to Caracas,” returned Darry. “My father was
-down there once--looking at a coffee plantation.”
-
-“A trip to Caracas wouldn’t be so much, Darry,” said Mark. “But
-you must remember that we are going further,--to the great lake of
-Maracaibo, and then around to the mouth of the Orinoco, and hundreds of
-miles up that immense stream. They tell me that the upper end of the
-Orinoco is as yet practically unexplored.”
-
-“Hurrah! we’ll become the Young Explorers!” cried Darry,
-enthusiastically. “Say, I wonder if the professor will want us to go
-armed?”
-
-“I don’t think so,” said Frank. “He’ll go armed, and as he is a crack
-shot I guess that will do for the lot of us.”
-
-“Glummy showed me a pearl-handled pistol he had just bought,” put in
-Sam. “He said it cost him sixteen dollars.”
-
-“He’d be sure to mention the price,” said Frank, with a sickly grin.
-“I’d like to see him face some wild beast--I’ll wager he’d drop his
-pistol and run for his life.”
-
-“Maybe somebody else would run, too,” came from Mark. “I don’t believe
-it’s much fun to stand up in front of a big wild animal.”
-
-“Are there any such in Venezuela?”
-
-“I don’t know--we’ll have to ask the professor.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER III
-
-ON BOARD THE STEAMER
-
-
-When the boys presented themselves at Professor Strong’s room at the
-Hotel Manhattan they found that worthy man looking over a number of
-purchases he had made while on his trip downtown.
-
-“Glad to see you, boys,” he said, as he shook one and another by the
-hand. “I trust you are all feeling well.”
-
-“Haven’t been sick a minute this summer,” answered Darry, and the
-others said about the same.
-
-“I see you have your firearms with you,” remarked Mark, as he gazed at
-a rifle and a double-barreled shotgun standing in a corner. “We were
-wondering if we were to go armed.”
-
-“I shouldn’t feel at home without my guns,” returned the professor with
-a smile. “You see that comes from being a confirmed old hunter. I don’t
-anticipate any use for them except when I go hunting. As for your going
-armed, I have already arranged with your parents about that. I shall
-take a shotgun for each, also a pistol, for use when we are in the
-wilds of the upper Orinoco.”
-
-“Will you lead us on a regular hunt?” asked Darry, eagerly.
-
-“I will if you’ll promise to behave and not get into unnecessary
-difficulties.”
-
-“We’ll promise,” came from all.
-
-“I have been making a number of purchases,” continued Professor Strong.
-“But I must make a number more, and if you wish you can go along and
-help me make the selections.”
-
-“Is Glummy--I mean is Jake Hockley coming up here?” questioned Mark.
-
-“I expected him to come with you. Isn’t he stopping with one of you?”
-
-“No, he’s stopping at the Astor House,” came from Frank.
-
-There was an awkward pause, which was very suggestive, and the
-professor noted it. With his gun in hand he faced the four.
-
-“I’m afraid you do not care much to have Master Hockley along,” he
-said, slowly.
-
-“Oh, I reckon we can get along,” answered Darry, after the others had
-failed to speak.
-
-“It is unfortunate that you are not all the best of friends. But
-Hockley asked me about the trip a long while ago and when it came to
-the point I could not see how I could refuse him. Besides that, I was
-thinking that perhaps the trip would do him good. I trust you will
-treat him fairly.”
-
-“Of course we’ll do that,” said Mark, slowly.
-
-“I guess there won’t be any trouble,” said Frank, but deep in his heart
-he feared otherwise.
-
-“Hockley has not had the benefits of much traveling,” continued the
-professor. “And traveling broadens the mind. The trip will do us all
-good.”
-
-They were soon on their way to Fourteenth Street, and then Broadway,
-and at several stores the professor purchased the articles he had put
-down on his list. The boys all helped to carry these back to the hotel.
-On arriving they found Jake Hockley sitting in the reception room
-awaiting them.
-
-The face of the lank youth fell when he saw that they had been out on
-a tour without him. “I’d been up earlier if you had sent me word,”
-he said to the professor. “I suppose I’ve got to get a lot of things
-myself, haven’t I?”
-
-“You have your clothing, haven’t you?--I mean the list I sent to you?”
-
-“Yes, sir.”
-
-“Then you are all right, for I have the other things.”
-
-From the professor the boys learned that the steamer for La Guayra, the
-nearest seaport to Caracas, the capital of Venezuela, would sail three
-days later.
-
-“There is a sailing every ten days,” said Professor Strong. “The
-steamers are not as large as those which cross the Atlantic but they
-are almost as comfortable, and I have seen to it that we shall have
-the best of the staterooms. The trip will take just a week, unless we
-encounter a severe storm which drives us back.”
-
-“I don’t want to meet a storm,” said Hockley.
-
-“Afraid of getting seasick,” came from Frank.
-
-“Not exactly,” snapped the lank youth. “Perhaps you’ll get seasick
-yourself.”
-
-“Does this steamer belong to the only line running to Venezuela?” asked
-Sam.
-
-“This is the only regular passenger line. There are other lines,
-carrying all sorts of freight, which run at irregular intervals, and
-then there are sailing vessels which often stop there in going up or
-down the coast.”
-
-The three days to follow passed swiftly, for at the last moment the
-professor and the boys found plenty of things to do. On the day when
-the steamer was to sail, Sam’s mother came down from Boston to see her
-son off, and the parents of Mark and Frank were also on hand, so that
-there was quite a family gathering. The baggage was already aboard, a
-trunk and a traveling case for each, as well as a leather bag for the
-guns and ammunition.
-
-At last came the familiar cry, “All ashore that’s going!” and the last
-farewells were said. A few minutes later the gang-plank was withdrawn
-and the lines unloosened. As the big steamer began to move, something
-like a lump arose in Frank’s throat.
-
-“We’re off!” he whispered to Mark. “Guess it’s going to be a long time
-before we get back.”
-
-Mark did not answer, for he was busy waving his handkerchief to his
-folks. Frank turned to Sam and saw that the tears were standing in the
-latter’s eyes, for Sam had caught sight of his mother in the act of
-wiping her eyes. Even Darry and Hockley were unusually sober.
-
-In quarter of an hour, however, the strain was over, and then the boys
-gave themselves up to the contemplation of the scene before them.
-Swiftly the steamer was plying her way between the ferry-boats and
-craft that crowded the stream. Soon the Battery was passed and the
-Statue of Liberty, and the tall buildings of the great metropolis began
-to fade away in the blue haze of the distance. The course was through
-the Narrows to the Lower Bay and then straight past Sandy Hook Light
-into the broad and sparkling Atlantic.
-
-“Take a good look at the light and the highlands below,” said the
-professor, as he sat beside the boys at the rail. “That’s the last bit
-of United States territory you’ll see for a long while to come--unless
-you catch sight of Porto Rico, which is doubtful.”
-
-“Won’t we stand in to shore when we round Cape Hatteras?” asked Hockley.
-
-“We shall not have to round Cape Hatteras, Hockley. Instead of hugging
-the eastern shore of the United States the steamer will sail almost due
-South for the Mona Passage on the west of Porto Rico. This will bring
-us into the Caribbean Sea, and then we shall sail somewhat westward
-for a brief stop at Curaçao, a Dutch island north of the coast of
-Venezuela. It is not a large place, but one of considerable importance.
-The submarine cable from Cuba to Venezuela has a station there.”
-
-“I’m going to study the map of Venezuela,” said Mark. “I know something
-about it already, but not nearly as much as I’d like to.”
-
-“To-morrow I’ll show you a large map of the country, which I have
-brought along,” answered Professor Strong. “And I’ll give you a little
-talk on the history of the people. But to-day you had better spend your
-time in making yourselves at home on the ship.”
-
-“I’m going to look at the engine room,” said Frank, who was interested
-in machinery, and down he went, accompanied by Darry. It was a
-beautiful sight, to see the triple expansion engines working so swiftly
-and yet so noiselessly, but it was frightfully hot below decks, and
-they did not remain as long as they had anticipated.
-
-They were now out of sight of land, and the long swells of the Atlantic
-caused the steamer to roll not a little. They found Sam huddled in a
-corner of the deck, looking as pale as a sheet.
-
-“Hullo, what’s up?” queried Frank, although he knew perfectly well.
-
-“Nothing’s up,” was the reply, given with an effort. “But I guess there
-will be something up soon,” and then Sam rushed off to his stateroom,
-and that was the last seen of him for that day.
-
-Mark was also slightly seasick, and thought best to lie down. Hockley
-was strolling the deck in deep contempt of those who had been taken ill.
-
-“I can’t see why anybody should get sick,” he sneered. “I’m sure
-there’s nothing to get sick about.”
-
-“Don’t crow, Glum--I mean Jake,” said Frank. “Your turn may come next.”
-
-“Me? I won’t get sick.”
-
-“Don’t be too sure.”
-
-“I’ll bet you five dollars I don’t get sick,” insisted the lank youth.
-
-“We’re not betting to-day,” put in Darry. “I hope you don’t get sick,
-but--I wouldn’t be too sure about it.” And he and Frank walked away.
-
-“What an awful blower he is,” said Frank, when they were out of
-hearing. “As if a person could help being sick if the beastly thing got
-around to him. I must confess I don’t feel very well myself.”
-
-“Nor I,” answered Darry, more soberly than ever.
-
-Dinner was served in the dining saloon at six o’clock, as elaborate a
-repast as at any leading hotel. But though the first-class passengers
-numbered forty only a dozen came to the table. Of the boys only Frank
-and Hockley were present, and it must be confessed that Frank’s
-appetite was very poor. Hockley appeared to be in the best of spirits
-and ate heartily.
-
-“This is usually the case,” said the professor, after having seen to it
-that the others were as comfortable as circumstances permitted. “But it
-won’t last, and that is a comfort. Hockley, if I were you, I would not
-eat too heartily.”
-
-“Oh, it won’t hurt me,” was the off-hand answer. “The salt air just
-suits me. I never felt better in my life.”
-
-“I am glad to hear it, and trust it keeps on doing you good.”
-
-Frank and Mark had a stateroom together and so had Sam and Darry.
-Hockley had stipulated that he have a stateroom to himself, and this
-had been provided. The professor occupied a room with a Dutch merchant
-bound for Curaçao, a jolly, good-natured gentleman, who was soon on
-good terms with all of the party.
-
-There was but little sleep for any of the boys during the earlier part
-of the night, for a stiff breeze was blowing and the steamer rolled
-worse than ever. But by three o’clock in the morning the wind went
-down and the sea seemed to grow easier, and all fell into a light
-slumber, from which Mark was the first to awaken.
-
-“I feel better, although pretty weak,” he said, with an attempt at a
-smile. “How is it with you, Frank?”
-
-“Oh, I didn’t catch it very badly.”
-
-“Did Glummy get sick?”
-
-“No.”
-
-“He’s in luck. How he will crow over us.”
-
-“If he starts to crow we’ll shut him up,” answered Frank, firmly.
-
-They were soon dressed and into the stateroom occupied by Sam and Darry.
-
-“Thanks, I’m myself again,” said Darry. “And why shouldn’t I be? I’m so
-clean inside I feel fairly polished. I can tell you, there’s nothing
-like a good dose of _mal de mer_, as the French call it, to turn one
-inside out.”
-
-“And how are you, Beans?” asked Mark.
-
-“I think I’m all here, but I’m not sure,” came from Sam. “But isn’t it
-a shame we should all be sick and Hockley should escape?”
-
-“Oh, he’s so thick-skinned the disease can’t strike through,” returned
-Frank.
-
-He had scarcely uttered the words when Darry, who had stepped out into
-the gangway between the staterooms came back with a peculiar smile on
-his face.
-
-“He’s got ’em,” he said.
-
-“He? Who? What has he got?” asked the others in a breath.
-
-“Glummy. He’s seasick, and he’s in his room doing more groaning than a
-Scotch bagpipe. Come and listen. But don’t make any noise.”
-
-Silently the quartet tiptoed their way out of the stateroom and to
-the door of the apartment occupied by Hockley. For a second there was
-silence. Then came a turning of a body on a berth and a prolonged groan
-of misery.
-
-“Oh, why did I come out here,” came from Hockley. “Oh dear, my head!
-Everything’s going round and round! Oh, if only this old tub would stop
-rolling for a minute--just a minute!” And then came another series of
-groans, followed by sounds which suggested that poor Hockley was about
-as sick as a boy can well be.
-
-“Let’s give him a cheer, just to brace him up,” suggested Frank, in a
-whisper.
-
-“Just the thing,” came from Darry. “My, but won’t it make him boiling
-mad!”
-
-But Mark interposed. “No, don’t do it, fellows, he feels bad enough
-already. Come on and leave him alone,” and this advice was followed and
-they went on deck. Here they met the professor, who wanted to know if
-they had seen Hockley.
-
-“No, sir, but we heard him,” said Sam. “He’s in a bad way, and perhaps
-he’d like to see you.”
-
-At this Professor Strong’s face became a study. Clearly he knew what
-was in the boys’ minds, but he did not betray it. Yet he had to
-smile when he was by himself. He went to see Hockley, and he did not
-re-appear on deck until two hours later.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IV
-
-VENEZUELA, PAST AND PRESENT
-
-
-“Supposing we now look at that map of Venezuela and learn a little
-about the history of the country,” said Professor Strong, immediately
-after the lunch hour and when all was quiet on board the steamer.
-“We can get in a corner of the cabin, and I don’t think anybody will
-disturb us.”
-
-Ordinarily the boys would not have taken to anything in the shape of a
-lecture, but they were anxious to know something more of the locality
-they were to visit, and so all readily agreed to follow Professor
-Strong to the nook he had selected. Hockley was still absent, and the
-others asked no questions concerning him. The professor hung up his map
-and sat on a chair before it, and the lads drew up camp chairs in a
-semi-circle before him.
-
-“As you will see by the map, Venezuela lies on the north coast of South
-America,” began Professor Strong. “It is bounded on the north by the
-Caribbean Sea, on the east by British Guiana, on the south by Brazil
-and on the west by Colombia. It is irregular in shape, and its greatest
-length is from south-east to north-west, about twelve hundred miles, or
-by comparison, about the distance from Maine to Minnesota or California
-to Kansas.”
-
-“Phew! that’s larger than I thought,” came from Frank, in an undertone.
-
-“Many of the South American republics are larger than most people
-realize,” went on the professor. “Venezuela has an estimated area of
-nearly 598,000 miles--to give it in round figures. That is as large as
-all of the New England States and half a dozen other States combined.
-The country has over a thousand rivers, large and small, over two
-hundred of which flow into the Caribbean Sea, and four hundred helping
-to swell the size of the mighty Orinoco, which, as you already know,
-is the second largest river in South America,--the largest being the
-Amazon of Brazil. The Orinoco is a worthy rival of our own Mississippi,
-and I am afraid you will find it just as muddy and full of snags and
-bars.”
-
-“Never mind, we’ll get through somehow,” put in Darry, and his dry way
-of saying it made even the professor laugh.
-
-“Besides the rivers, there are a number of lakes and bays. Of the
-former, the largest is Lake Maracaibo, with an area of 2,100 square
-miles.”
-
-“That must be the Maracaibo coffee district,” suggested Mark.
-
-“To a large extent it is, for the lake is surrounded by coffee and
-cocoa plantations. In the interior is another body of water, Lake
-Valencia, which possesses the peculiarity of being elevated nearly
-1,700 feet above the ocean level. All told, the country is well watered
-and consequently vegetation is abundant.”
-
-“But I thought it was filled up with mountains?” came from Sam.
-
-“A large part of the country is mountainous, as you can see by the map,
-but there are also immense plains, commonly called _llanos_. The great
-Andes chain strikes Venezuela on the west and here divides into two
-sections, one running northward toward the Caribbean Sea and the other
-to the north-eastward. Some parts of these chains are very high, and
-at a point about a hundred miles south of Lake Maracaibo there are two
-peaks which are each over 15,000 feet high and are perpetually covered
-with snow.”
-
-“I guess we won’t climb them,” observed Sam.
-
-“I hardly think so myself, Samuel, although we may get a good view
-of them from a distance, when we visit Lake Maracaibo. Besides these
-chains of mountains there are others to the southward, and here the
-wilderness is so complete that it has not yet been thoroughly explored.
-It is a land full of mountain torrents, and one of these, after flowing
-through many plains and valleys, unites the Orinoco with the Amazon,
-although the watercourse is not fit for navigation by even fair sized
-boats.”
-
-“What about the people?” asked Mark, after a long pause, during which
-all of them examined the map more closely, and the professor pointed
-out La Guayra, Caracas, and a dozen or more other places of importance.
-
-“The people are of Spanish, Indian and mixed blood, with a fair
-sprinkling of Americans and Europeans. There has been no accurate
-census taken for a number of years, but the population is put down as
-over two and three quarters millions and of this number about three
-hundred thousand are Indians.”
-
-“Are those Indians like our own?” questioned Darry.
-
-“A great deal like the Indians of the old south-west, excepting
-that they are much more peaceful. You can travel almost anywhere in
-Venezuela, and if you mind your own business it is rarely that an
-Indian or a negro will molest you. And now let me ask if any of you
-know what the name Venezuela means?”
-
-“I don’t,” said Frank, and the others shook their heads.
-
-“The name Venezuela means Little Venice. The north shore was discovered
-by Columbus in 1498. One year later a Castilian knight named Ojeda came
-westward, accompanied by Amerigo Vespucci, and the pair with their four
-ships sailed from the mouth of the Orinoco to the Isthmus of Panama.
-They also explored part of Lake Maracaibo, and when Vespucci saw the
-natives floating around in their canoes it reminded him of Venice in
-Italy, with its canals and gondolas, and he named the country Little
-Venice, or Venezuela. When Vespucci got home he wrote an elaborate
-account of his voyage, and this so pleased those in authority they
-immediately called the entire country America, in his honor, and
-America it has been ever since.”
-
-“Yes, but it ought to be called Columbia,” put in Frank, as the
-professor paused.
-
-“Perhaps you are right, Newton, but it’s too late to change it now.
-The Spaniards made the first settlement in Venezuela in 1520, and
-the country remained true to Spain until 1811. Ojeda was first made
-governor of all the north coast of South America, which soon took the
-name of the Spanish Main. Pearls were found in the Gulf of Paria, and
-the Spaniards at Santo Domingo rushed into South America and treated
-the innocent natives with the utmost cruelty. This brought on a fierce
-war lasting over forty years. This was in the times of Charles V,
-and he once sold the entire country to the Velsers of Augsburg, who
-treated the poor natives even worse than they had been treated by
-the Spaniards. In the end, between the fighting and the earthquakes
-which followed, the natives were either killed off or driven into the
-interior. Then came another Castilian knight, who in 1567 founded the
-city of Caracas, so called after the Indians who used to live there.”
-
-“I have often read stories of the Spanish Main,” said Mark. “They must
-have been bloody times.”
-
-“They were, for piracy and general lawlessness were on every hand. The
-Spaniards ruled the people with a rod of iron, and everything that the
-country produced in the way of wealth went into the pockets of the
-rulers. At last the natives could stand it no longer, and a revolution
-took place, under the leadership of Simon Bolivar, and a ten years’ war
-followed, and the Spanish soldiery was forced to leave the country.
-
-“At first Venezuela, with New Granada, (now Colombia) and Ecuador
-formed the Republic of Colombia. Simon Bolivar, often called the
-George Washington of South America, was the President of the Republic.
-At Bolivar’s death Venezuela became independent, and has remained
-independent ever since. Slavery was abolished there in 1854.”
-
-“They were ahead of us in that,” observed Frank.
-
-“So they were, and the credit is due to Jose Gregorio Monagas, who
-suffered a martyr’s death in consequence. The freeing of the slaves
-threw the country into another revolution, and matters were not settled
-until 1870, when Antonio Guzman Blanco came into power and ruled until
-1889. After this followed another series of outbreaks, one political
-leader trying to push another out of office, and this has hurt trade
-a good deal. At present General Castro is President of Venezuela, but
-there is no telling how long his enemies will allow him to retain that
-office.”
-
-“I hope we don’t get mixed up in any of their revolutions,” said Sam.
-
-“I shouldn’t mind it,” put in Darry. “Anything for excitement, you
-know.”
-
-“Venezuela has been divided into many different states and territories
-at different times,” continued Professor Strong. “In 1854 there were
-thirteen provinces which were soon after increased to twenty-one. In
-1863 the Federalists conquered the Unionists, and the provinces were
-re-named states and reduced to seven. But this could not last, for
-fewer states meant fewer office holders, so the number was increased
-to twenty states, three territories and one federal district. What the
-present government will do toward making divisions there is no telling.”
-
-“I should think they would get tired of this continual fighting,” said
-Darry.
-
-“The peons, or common people, do get very tired of it, but they
-cannot stop the ambitions of the political leaders, who have the
-entire soldiery under their thumb. These leaders have seen so much of
-fighting, and heard of so much fighting in their sister republics, that
-it seems to get in their blood and they can’t settle down for more than
-a few years at a time. But as outsiders come in, with capital, and
-develop the country, I think conditions will change, and soon South
-America will be as stable as North America or Europe.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER V
-
-HOCKLEY MAKES A BOSOM FRIEND
-
-
-“Now I feel as if I knew a little more than I did before,” observed
-Frank to Mark, after the professor’s talk had come to an end and the
-teacher had gone to put away his map. “It’s a pretty big country, isn’t
-it?”
-
-“It is, Frank, and at the best I suppose we can see only a small
-portion of it. But it would be queer if we got mixed up in any of their
-fighting, wouldn’t it?”
-
-“Do you really think we shall?”
-
-“I don’t know. But just before we left New York I saw a long article
-in one of the newspapers about affairs in Venezuela, Colombia and on
-the Isthmus. It seems that the Presidents of the two Republics are
-unfriendly, and as a consequence the President of Venezuela has given
-aid to the rebels in Colombia, while the President of Colombia is doing
-what he can to foment trouble in Venezuela. Besides that Nicaragua and
-Ecuador are in the mix-up. The papers said that fighting has been
-going on in some places for years and that thousands of lives have been
-lost, especially in the vicinity of the Isthmus.”
-
-“It’s a wonder the professor didn’t speak of this.”
-
-“Oh, I guess he didn’t want to scare us. Perhaps the soldiery doesn’t
-interfere with foreigners, if, as he says, the foreigners mind their
-own business.”
-
-The day was all that one could wish and the boys enjoyed it fully, for
-the seasickness of the day before had done each good. Mark and his
-chums wondered how Hockley was faring, and at last Sam went to the
-professor to inquire.
-
-“He is a very sick young man,” said Professor Strong. “His over-eating
-has much to do with it. But I hope to see him better in the morning.”
-
-“Do you think he would like to see any of us?” asked Sam. “We’ll go
-willingly if you think best.”
-
-“No, he said he wished to see no one but myself, Winthrop. You will do
-best to let him alone, and when he comes out I wouldn’t say anything
-about the affair,” concluded the professor.
-
-To while away the time the boys went over the steamer from end to end,
-and an obliging under-officer explained the engines, the steering gear
-and other things of interest to them. So the time passed swiftly
-enough until it was again the hour to retire.
-
-Hockley appeared about ten o’clock on the following morning, thinner
-than ever and with big rings under his eyes. He declined to eat any
-breakfast and was content to sit by himself in a corner on deck.
-
-“I suppose you fellows think I was seasick,” he said, as Sam and Darry
-passed close to him. “But if you do, you are mistaken. I ate something
-that didn’t agree with me and that threw me into a regular fit of
-biliousness. I get them every six months or so, you know.”
-
-“I didn’t know,” returned Darry, who had never seen Hockley sick in his
-life. “But I’m glad you are over it,” he went on, kindly.
-
-“I suppose Frank and Mark are laughing in their sleeves at me,” went on
-the lank youth, with a scowl.
-
-“I don’t believe they are thinking of it,” answered Sam. “We’ve been
-inspecting the ship from top to bottom and stem to stern, and that has
-kept us busy. You ought to go around, it’s really very interesting.”
-
-“Pooh! I’ve been through ’em loads of times--on the regular Atlantic
-liners,--twice as big as this,” grumbled Hockley.
-
-A few words more followed, and Sam and Darry passed on. “He’s all right
-again,” observed Darry. “And his seasickness didn’t cure him of his
-bragging either.”
-
-The steamer was now getting well down toward the Mona Passage, and
-on the day following land was sighted in the distance, a series of
-somewhat barren rocks. A heavy wind was blowing.
-
-“Now we are going to pass through the monkey,” said Darry, after a talk
-with the professor.
-
-“Pass through the monkey?” repeated Frank. “Is this another of your
-little jokes, Darry?”
-
-“Not at all. Mona means monkey, so the professor told me.”
-
-“Will we stop?”
-
-“No, we won’t go anywhere near land. The next steamer stops, I believe,
-but not this one.”
-
-“I wouldn’t mind spending some time in Porto Rico and Cuba,” put in
-Mark. “There must have been great excitement during the war with Spain.”
-
-“Perhaps we’ll stop there on our way home,” said Sam. “I should like to
-visit Havana.”
-
-The Mona Passage, or Strait, passed, the course of the steamer was
-changed to the south-westward. They were now in the Caribbean Sea, but
-the waters looked very much as they had on the bosom of the Atlantic.
-The wind increased until the blow promised to be an unusually severe
-one.
-
-“My, but this wind is a corker!” ejaculated Frank, as he and Mark
-tried in vain to walk the open deck. “Perhaps we are going to have a
-hurricane.”
-
-“You boys had better come inside,” said Professor Strong as he hurried
-up. “It’s not safe to be here. A sudden lurch of the steamer might hurl
-you overboard.”
-
-“All right, we’ll come in,” said Mark.
-
-He had scarcely spoken when an extra puff of wind came along, banging
-the loose things in the open cabin right and left. The wind took
-Frank’s cap from his head and sent it spinning aft.
-
-“My cap!” cried the youth and started after it.
-
-“Be careful of yourself!” came from the professor, but the fury of the
-wind drowned out his voice completely.
-
-Bound to save his cap Frank followed it to the rail. As he stooped to
-pick it up the steamer gave a sudden roll to the opposite side and he
-was thrown headlong. At the same moment the spray came flying on
-board, nearly blinding him.
-
-[Illustration: “Stay where you are!”]
-
-“He’ll go overboard if he isn’t careful!” ejaculated Mark, and ran
-after his chum.
-
-“You be careful yourself,” came from Professor Strong, as he too rushed
-to the rescue.
-
-Before either could reach Frank the youth had turned over and was
-trying to raise himself to his feet. But now the steamer rolled once
-more and in a flash Frank was thrown almost on top of the rail. He
-caught the netting below with one hand but his legs went over the side.
-
-“Oh!” burst out Mark, and could say no more, for his heart was in his
-throat. He thought Frank would be washed away in a moment more. The
-spray still continued to fly all over the deck and at times his chum
-could scarcely be seen.
-
-“Stay where you are,” called out Professor Strong, to Mark. Then he
-turned and in a moment more was at the rail and holding both Frank and
-himself. Following the advice given, Mark held fast to a nearby window.
-
-By this time a couple of deck hands were hurrying to the scene, one
-with a long line. One end of the line was fastened to the companionway
-rail and the other run out to where the professor and Frank remained.
-The boy was all out of breath and could do but little toward helping
-himself. But Professor Strong’s grip was a good one, and it did not
-relax until one of the deck hands helped the lad to a place along the
-rope. The deck hand went ahead and the professor brought up the rear,
-with Frank between them. In a moment more they were at the companionway
-and Frank fairly tumbled below, with the others following him.
-
-“Gracious, but that was a close shave!” panted the boy, when able to
-speak. “I hadn’t any idea the steamer would roll so much.”
-
-“After this when it blows heavily you must remain in the cabin,”
-said Professor Strong, rather severely. “And if your cap wants to go
-overboard--”
-
-“I’ll let it go,” finished Frank. “I won’t do anything like that again
-for a train load of caps, you can depend on that.”
-
-The storm increased, and by nightfall it was raining heavily. The boys
-had expected a good deal of thunder and lightning, but it did not come,
-and by sunrise wind and rain were a thing of the past and the steamer
-was pursuing her course as smoothly as ever.
-
-On board the ship were half a dozen passengers bound for Curaçao,
-including Herr Dombrich, the merchant who occupied a portion of
-Professor Strong’s stateroom. One of the number going ashore at the
-little island was a man from Baltimore, a fellow with Dutch blood in
-his veins, who had formerly been in the saloon business, and who was
-far from trustworthy. His name was Dan Markel, and, strange as it may
-seem, he had formed a fairly close acquaintanceship with Jake Hockley.
-
-“I wish I had the money you have,” said Dan Markel to Hockley, one
-afternoon, as the two were sitting alone near the bow of the steamer.
-“There are lots of openings in Curaçao for a fellow with a little
-capital. The Dutchmen down there don’t know how to do business. With
-five hundred dollars I could make ten thousand in less than a year.”
-
-“Haven’t you got five hundred dollars?” asked Hockley, with interest.
-
-“Not now. I had a good deal more than that, but I was burnt out, and
-there was a flaw in my insurance papers, so I couldn’t get my money
-from the company.” Dan Markel told the falsehood without a blush.
-
-“But what do you expect to do in Curaçao without money--strike some
-sort of job?”
-
-“I’ve got a rich friend, who has a plantation in the interior. I think
-he will give me a place. But I’d rather establish myself in the town.
-He wrote to me that there was a good opening for a tobacco shop. If I
-could get somebody to advance me five hundred dollars I’d be willing to
-pay back a thousand for it at the end of six months.”
-
-Now Hockley was carrying five hundred dollars with him, which an
-indulgent father had given to him for “extras,” as he expressed it, for
-Professor Strong was to pay all regular bills. The money was in gold,
-for gold is a standard no matter where you travel. Hockley thought of
-this gold, and of how he would like it to be a thousand instead of five
-hundred dollars.
-
-“I’ve got five hundred dollars with me,” he said, in his bragging way.
-“My father gave it to me to have a good time on.”
-
-“Then you must be rich,” was the answer from the man from Baltimore.
-
-“Dad’s a millionaire,” said Hockley, trying to put on an air of
-superiority. “Made every cent of it himself, too.”
-
-“I suppose you’ve got to pay your way with the money.”
-
-“No, old Strong pays the bills.”
-
-“Then you’re in luck. I suppose you don’t want to put that money out at
-a hundred per cent. interest,” went on Dan Market, shrewdly. “It would
-be as safe as in a bank, my word on it.”
-
-“I want to use the money, that’s the trouble. I intend to have a good
-time in Venezuela.”
-
-“You ought to have it, on that money. I wish I had your chance. Caracas
-is a dandy city for sport, if you know the ropes.”
-
-“Then you have been there?”
-
-“Yes, four years ago,” answered Markel, and this was another falsehood,
-for he had never been near South America in his life. He had spent
-his time in drifting from one city in the United States to another,
-invariably leaving a trail of debts behind him.
-
-“And you know the people?”
-
-“Yes, some of the very best of them. And I can show you the best of the
-cock fighting and the bull fighting, too, if you want to see them.”
-
-“That’s what I want,” answered Hockley, his eyes brightening. “No old
-slow poke of a trip for me. I suppose Professor Strong expects to make
-us toe the mark everywhere we go, but I don’t intend to stand it. I
-came for a good time, and if I can’t get it with the rest of the party
-I’m going to go it on my own hook.”
-
-“To be sure--that’s just what I’d do.” Dan Markel slapped Hockley on
-the back. “Hang me if you ain’t a young man after my own heart. For two
-pins I’d go down to Caracas with you, just to show you around.”
-
-“I wish you would!” cried Hockley.
-
-“The trouble is while I can spare the time I can’t spare the money. I’d
-take you up in a minute if it wasn’t for that.”
-
-“Never mind the money--I’ll foot the bill,” answered Hockley, never
-dreaming of how his offer would result. “I’d like to have a companion
-who had been around and who knew where the real sport lay. You come
-with me, and you can return to Curaçao after our crowd leaves Caracas.”
-
-A talk of half an hour followed. Markel pretended to be unwilling to
-accept the generous offer at first, but at length agreed to go with
-Hockley and remain with him so long as the Strong party stopped at
-Caracas. He was to show Hockley all the “fancy sports” of the town and
-introduce him to a number of swells and “high rollers.” On the strength
-of the compact he borrowed fifty dollars on the spot, giving his I. O. U.
-in exchange, a bit of paper not worth the ink used in drawing it up.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VI
-
-A PLAN THAT FAILED
-
-
-“Hockley has found a new friend,” observed Mark to Sam that afternoon.
-“A man a number of years older than himself, too.”
-
-“So I’ve noticed, Mark. I must say I don’t quite fancy the appearance
-of the stranger.”
-
-“Nor I. He looks rakish and dissipated. I wonder where he is bound?”
-
-“I heard him speaking about getting off at Curaçao. If that’s the case
-we won’t have him with us after to-morrow.”
-
-“Do we stop at the island to-morrow?”
-
-“Yes, we’ll be there before noon, so the professor says.”
-
-Just then Darry appeared and joined them. He had been in the cabin, and
-Hockley had introduced Dan Markel to him.
-
-“Mr. Markel is a great talker, but I don’t take stock in much he says,”
-said Darry. “Hockley evidently thinks him just all right. He was going
-to stop at Curaçao but has changed his mind and is going right through
-to Caracas. He says he knows Caracas like a book.”
-
-“Perhaps he intends to take Hockley around,” suggested Sam.
-
-“It was my impression we were all to go around with the professor,”
-came from Mark.
-
-“That was the plan,” said Darry. “He’d have a good deal of bother if he
-allowed everyone to run off where he pleased. I don’t believe Hockley
-liked it much because I didn’t seem to care for his new friend.”
-
-“Let him think as he pleases--we haven’t got to put ourselves out for
-his benefit,” said Mark; and there the subject was dropped for the time
-being.
-
-In the meantime Frank had met Hockley and Dan Markel coming out of
-the stateroom the latter occupied. Markel had asked the lank youth
-to come below and take a drink with him, and Hockley had accepted,
-and a first drink had been followed by two more, which put Hockley in
-rather an “elevated” state of mind, even though he was used to drinking
-moderately when at home.
-
-“My very best friend, Frank,” he called out. “Mr. Dan Markel. Mr.
-Markel, this is one of our party, Frank Newton, of New York city.”
-
-“Happy to know you,” responded Market, giving Frank’s hand a warm
-shake. “It’s a real pleasure to make friends on such a lonely trip as
-this.”
-
-“I haven’t found it particularly lonely,” said Frank, stiffly. He was
-not favorably impressed by the appearance of the man from Baltimore.
-
-“That’s because you have so many friends with you, my boy. With me it
-was different. I didn’t know a soul until Mr. Hockley and myself struck
-up an acquaintanceship.”
-
-“But now it’s all right, eh?” put in Hockley, gripping Markel’s
-shoulder in a brotherly way.
-
-“To be sure it’s all right,” was the quick answer. “We’ll stick
-together and have a good time. Perhaps young Newton will join us?”
-
-“Thank you, but I shall stick to my chums,” answered Frank, coolly, and
-walked off, leaving Markel staring after him.
-
-“The little beggar!” muttered Hockley, when Frank was out of hearing.
-“I’d like to wring his neck for him.”
-
-“Why, what’s the trouble?”
-
-“Oh, nothing in particular, but somehow he and the rest of the crowd
-seem to be down on me, and they are making it as unpleasant as they can
-at every opportunity.”
-
-“You don’t say! It’s a wonder Professor Strong permits it.”
-
-“They take good care to be decent when he’s around, and of course I’m
-no tale bearer, to go to him. But I would like to fix young Newton.”
-
-“Is he worse than the others?”
-
-“Sometimes I think he is. Anyway, if I got square on him it might teach
-the others a lesson.”
-
-Frank joined his chums and told what had taken place. At the next
-meal Markel was introduced to the others, but all ignored him, and
-even Professor Strong showed that he did not like the idea of Hockley
-picking up such an acquaintance.
-
-The fact that he had been snubbed made Dan Markel angry, and feeling
-that Hockley was now his friend and would back him up, he let out a
-stream of abuse, in the privacy of his stateroom, with the lank youth
-taking it in and nodding vigorously.
-
-“You are right, that little cub is the worst,” said Markel, referring
-to Frank. “He needs taming down. I wish I had him under my care for a
-week or two, I’d show him how to behave.”
-
-“I’ve been thinking of an idea,” retorted Hockley, slowly. “It would be
-a grand scheme if we could put it through.”
-
-“What is it?”
-
-“We are going to land at Curaçao to-morrow. I wish I could arrange it
-so one of the other fellows would be left behind to paddle his own
-canoe. It would take some of the importance out of him.”
-
-“Well, that might be arranged,” returned Markel, rubbing his chin
-reflectively. “Perhaps we might fix it so that all of them were left
-there stranded.”
-
-“How long will the steamer stay there?”
-
-“Six hours, so I heard the captain tell one of the other passengers.”
-
-“The trouble is we’ll all have to go ashore with the professor, if they
-let us go ashore at all.”
-
-“Well, we’ll try to think up some scheme,” said the man from Baltimore;
-and then the subject was changed.
-
-Curaçao is the largest and most important of the Dutch West Indian
-Islands, with a population of about 25,000 souls. The island is largely
-of a phosphate nature, and the government derives a handsome income
-from the sale of this product. To the east of Curaçao is Bonaire,
-another Dutch possession, and to the west Aruba, all of which are
-likely to become a part of United States territory in the near future.
-The islands are of considerable importance, and trade not alone in
-phosphate of lime but also in salt, beans, dyewoods and fruits.
-
-Early in the morning the dim outlines of Curaçao could be seen and
-about ten o’clock the steamer glided into the bay of St. Anna, upon
-which Willemstad, the capital city is located. The harbor is a
-commodious one, and ships displaying the flags of many nations were on
-every hand.
-
-“What a pretty town!” exclaimed Mark, as he surveyed the distant
-shore with a glass. “I declare it looks like some of these old Dutch
-paintings.”
-
-“This island is famous in history,” said Professor Strong, who stood
-by. “It was discovered by the Spaniards in 1527. About a hundred years
-after that the Dutch took it and held it for nearly two hundred years.
-Then the English came over and wrested it from the Dutch, but had to
-give it back eight years later, in 1815. The pirates and buccaneers
-used to find these islands excellent stopping places, and many a
-political refugee has ended his days on them.”
-
-“Is the capital very large?”
-
-“About fifteen thousand inhabitants.”
-
-“How about going ashore and taking a look around?” questioned Darry.
-“I’d like first rate to stretch my legs on land once more.”
-
-“Oh, yes, do let us go ashore?” pleaded Frank. “The steamer is going to
-stay five or six hours, and that will give us loads of time for looking
-around.”
-
-“I will see what can be done when we anchor,” said the professor. “They
-may be very strict here--I do not know.”
-
-Soon the big steamer was close up to the wharf where she was to
-discharge part of her cargo and passengers. One of the first parties to
-leave was Herr Dombrich, who shook hands cordially with the professor.
-
-“It has been von great bleasure to sail mit you,” said the Dutch
-merchant. “I vos hobe ve meet again, not so?”
-
-“I’m thinking of taking the boys ashore,” said the professor. “They
-would like to see the city.”
-
-“Yes, yes, surely you must do dot,” was the reply. “I vould go mit you,
-but I must on pisiness go to de udder side of de island. Goot py!” and
-in a moment Herr Dombrich was ashore and lost in a crowd. Then Mark
-caught a glimpse of him as he was driven away in an old-fashioned Dutch
-carriage which had been waiting for him.
-
-An interview was had with some custom house and other officials, and
-the party obtained permission to go ashore and roam around the place
-until the steamer should set sail for La Guayra. In the meantime Dan
-Markel had already disappeared up one of the long docks.
-
-The man from Baltimore was in a quandary. He had borrowed fifty dollars
-from Hockley, and he was strongly inclined to hide until the steamer
-should sail and then use the money to suit himself. But he realized
-that his capital, which now represented a total of eighty dollars,
-would not last forever, and a brief look around Willemstad convinced
-him that it was not at all the city he had anticipated.
-
-“I’d starve to death here, after the money was gone,” he reasoned.
-“I’ll wager these Dutchmen are regular misers. The best thing I can do
-is to go to Caracas with that crowd and then squeeze that young fool
-out of another fifty, or maybe a couple of hundred.”
-
-He had come ashore after another talk with Hockley, in which he had
-promised to lay some plan whereby one or another of the boys might be
-left behind. He had been told by the captain of the steamer that the
-vessel would sail at five o’clock sharp. If he could only manage to
-keep somebody ashore until ten or fifteen minutes after that hour the
-deed would be done.
-
-The day was hot and, as was usual with him, Markel was dry, and he
-entered the first wine shop he discovered. Here he imbibed freely, with
-the consequence that when he arose to go his mind was far from being as
-free as it had been.
-
-“I guess I’ll go and see a little more of the town on my own hook
-before I try to make any arrangements,” he muttered to himself, and
-strolled on until another drinking place presented itself. Here he met
-another American, and the pair threw dice for drinks for over an hour.
-Then the man from Baltimore dozed off in a chair, and did not awaken
-until a number of hours later.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VII
-
-FROM CURAÇAO TO LA GUAYRA
-
-
-Leaving the steamer, our friends proceeded to the main thoroughfare of
-Willemstad, a quaint old street, scrupulously clean--a characteristic
-of every Dutch town--and with buildings that looked as if they had been
-moved over from Amsterdam. Not far off was the home of the governor
-of the island, a mansion with walls of immense thickness. The place
-fronted the bay and near by was something of a fortress with a few
-ancient cannon. Here a number of Dutch soldiers were on duty.
-
-“I will see if I cannot get carriages, and then we can drive around,”
-said Professor Strong, and this was done, and soon they were moving
-along slowly, for no Dutch hackman ever thinks of driving fast. Besides
-it was now the noon hour, and the hackmen would rather have taken their
-midday nap than earn a couple of dollars. The boys soon discovered
-that in the tropics to do anything, or to have anything done for you,
-between the hours of eleven to three is extremely difficult. Merchants
-close their places of business and everybody smokes and dreams or goes
-to sleep.
-
-“I see a lot of negroes,” observed Mark, as they moved along.
-
-“The population is mostly of colored blood,” answered the professor.
-“The colored people are all free, yet the few Dutchmen that are here
-are virtually their masters. The negroes work in the phosphate mines,
-and their task is harder than that of a Pennsylvania coal miner ten
-times over. If we had time we might visit one of the phosphate works,
-but I hate to risk it.”
-
-“For such a small place there are lots of ships here,” put in Sam.
-
-“That is true and I think the reason is because this is a free port of
-entry. The ships bring in all sorts of things, and some say a good deal
-of the stuff is afterwards smuggled into Venezuela and Colombia.”
-
-They drove on, past the quaint shops and other buildings, but in an
-opposite direction to that taken by Dan Markel. During the drive
-Hockley had little or nothing to say. He was worried over the
-non-appearance of the man from Baltimore, and looked for him eagerly
-at every corner and cross road.
-
-“He’s made a mess of it,” he thought. “We’ll be driving back soon and
-that will be the end of it.” And then he thought of the fifty dollars
-and began to suspect Markel, and something like a chill passed over him.
-
-“If he cheated me I’ll fix him, see if I don’t!” he told himself. Yet
-he felt that he was helpless and could do nothing, for the loan had
-been a fair one.
-
-“There is a curious story connected with the Island of Curaçao,” said
-the professor, as they passed along through the suburbs of the capital.
-“It is said that in years gone by some of the old Spanish pirates
-filled a cave in the interior with gold and then sprinkled a trail of
-salt from the cave to the sea. Some time after that the pirates were
-captured and all made to walk the plank. One of them, in an endeavor
-to save his life, told of the treasure and of the trail that had been
-left. Those who had captured the pirates immediately sailed for the
-island, but before they could reach here a fearful hurricane came up,
-washing the land from end to end and entirely destroying the trail of
-salt, so that the treasure has not been unearthed to this day.”
-
-For the greater part the road was hard, dusty and unshaded. But in
-spots were beautiful groves of plantains and oranges, while cocoanut
-palms were by no means lacking. The houses everywhere were low, broad,
-and with walls of great thickness, and in between them were scattered
-the huts of the poorer class, built of palm thatch and often covered
-with vines.
-
-On the return they passed an old Dutch saw-mill, where a stout Dutchman
-was directing the labors of a dozen coal-black natives. The natives
-droned a tune as they moved the heavy logs into the mill. They appeared
-to be only half awake, and the master threatened them continually in an
-endeavor to make them move faster.
-
-“They are not killing themselves with work,” observed Sam.
-
-“They never work as fast in the tropics as they do in the temperate
-zone of our own country,” answered Professor Strong. “The heat is
-against it. Even the most active of men are apt to become easy-going
-after they have been here a number of years.”
-
-The drive took longer than anticipated and when they again reached
-the docks the steamer was ready to sail. They were soon on board, and
-a little later St. Anna harbor was left behind and the journey to
-Venezuela was resumed.
-
-“What’s up?” asked Mark, of Hockley, when he saw the lank youth
-walking through the cabins looking in one direction and another. “Lost
-anything?”
-
-“No,” was the curt answer, and then with a peculiar look in his eyes,
-Hockley continued: “Have you seen anything of Mr. Markel since we came
-on board?”
-
-“I have not. He got off at Willemstad.”
-
-“I know it. But he was going through to La Guayra and Caracas.”
-
-“Well, I haven’t seen him,” answered Mark, and moved on.
-
-Hockley continued his search for over an hour and then went to the
-purser, and from that individual learned that Markel had taken no
-stateroom for the coming night nor had he paid passage money to be
-carried to La Guayra.
-
-“That settles it,” muttered Hockley to himself, as he walked off. “He
-has given me the slip and I am out my fifty dollars. What a fool I was
-to trust him! And I thought he was such a fine fellow!” And he gripped
-his fists in useless rage. He fancied that he had seen the last of the
-man from Baltimore, but he was mistaken.
-
-That night the boys went to bed full of expectations for the morrow,
-for the run from Curaçao to La Guayra, the nearest seaport to Caracas,
-is but a short one.
-
-“My, but it’s getting hot!” observed Frank, while undressing. “It’s
-more than I bargained for.”
-
-“You must remember we are only twelve degrees north of the equator,”
-answered Mark. “Wait till we strike the Orinoco, then I guess you’ll do
-some sweating. That stream is only about seven or eight degrees above
-the line.”
-
-Nevertheless the boys passed a fairly comfortable night and did not
-arise until it was time for breakfast. Then they went on deck to watch
-for the first sight of land.
-
-“Hurrah! There’s land!” was Darry’s cry, some hours later. He held a
-glass in his hand. “My, what a mountain!”
-
-One after another looked through the glass, and at a great distance
-made out a gigantic cliff overhanging the sea. As the steamer came
-closer they made out the wall more plainly, and saw the lazy clouds
-drifting by its top and between its clefts. At the foot of the gigantic
-cliff was a narrow patch of sand with here and there a few tropical
-trees and bushes. Upon the sand the breakers rushed with a low, booming
-sound, and in spots they covered the rocks with a milklike foam.
-
-“I don’t see anything of a town,” said Frank.
-
-“We have got to round yonder point before you can see it,” answered an
-under-officer standing near. “It’s not much of a place, and it’s tucked
-away right under the mountain.”
-
-An hour later they rounded the point that had been mentioned and at
-a distance made out La Guayra, which is located on a narrow strip of
-land between the great cliff and the sea. They could see but little
-outside of several long and narrow streets running parallel with the
-mountain. At one end of the town was a small hill, with several long,
-low government buildings and a church or two.
-
-“When I was here before, one had to be taken ashore in a small boat,”
-said Professor Strong. “The ocean ran with great swiftness along the
-beach. But now they have a breakwater and some first-class docks and
-there is little trouble.”
-
-“The town seems to be hemmed in,” said Sam. “How do they get anywhere
-excepting by boat?”
-
-“There is a road over the mountain and a railroad track, too. But it’s
-up-hill climbing from beginning to end.”
-
-“What’s that thing on yonder hillside?” asked Mark, pointing to a
-somewhat dilapidated building, one side of which was set up on long
-sticks.
-
-“That is the old bull fighting ring. In days gone by they used to have
-very fierce fights there and much money used to be wagered on the
-contests. But the folks are beginning to become civilized now and the
-bull fighting doesn’t amount to much.”
-
-As soon as the passengers had landed from the steamer they found
-themselves in the hands of the custom-house officials, who proceeded to
-collect all they thought was due. In the meantime, while the professor
-was busy paying the duties, Mark and the others strolled through the
-little park fronting the pier.
-
-“This isn’t so bad,” said Frank, as he gazed at the fountain and the
-heroic statue of General Guzman Blanco. “Wonder what that big building
-behind us is.”
-
-It proved to be the custom house, an ancient building looking for all
-the world like a fort. There was a heavy wall, with an arched gateway
-and a great staircase leading to the rooms in the upper part of the
-building. The walls were of huge stones and were five to six feet in
-thickness.
-
-“Whoever built this, built it to last,” said Sam. “I don’t think
-anything less than an earthquake could bring it down.”
-
-“I suppose they have used it for a fort for years,” said Darry, and
-he hit the truth exactly. “When there is a rebellion in a country the
-custom house is always more or less of a point of interest.”
-
-They were soon joined by Professor Strong, who conducted them to a
-modest looking hotel not many squares away.
-
-“We will remain here over night and take the train for Caracas in the
-morning,” said the professor. “I want you to see what a triumph of
-engineering skill this road is, and you can’t see that in the darkness.”
-
-“Phew! what a smell!” came from Hockley, as he turned up his nose. “La
-Guayra isn’t very clean.”
-
-“You are right, Hockley, although the town is much better than it used
-to be. When I was here years ago the streets were literally covered
-with filth and there was a good deal of sickness. You see, it is really
-nothing but a seaport. Only those who have to work here will stay.”
-
-Their rooms were not of the best, and during the night Frank got up
-several times, declaring that his bed was inhabited. All were outside
-by dawn and saw the sun rise over the rolling sea. Then a breakfast
-of rolls, coffee and fish was had and they proceeded to the railroad
-station--to take the most exciting railroad ride that they had ever
-experienced.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VIII
-
-ON A CLIFF AND UNDER
-
-
-“Hurrah for a railroad ride over the mountains!” cried Darry, as they
-proceeded to the station. “Wonder how long it will be?”
-
-“Twenty-four miles, so the professor said,” responded Sam. “He said
-Caracas is only six miles away and the mule path isn’t over nine miles
-long. But the lowest part of the mountain is nearly a mile high and the
-train has to do a lot of twisted traveling to get over it.”
-
-“Wonder they wouldn’t tunnel the mountain,” suggested Frank.
-
-“That’s what they are talking of doing,” put in Hockley, who felt just
-then like being sociable. “Somebody has got a franchise, but it’s going
-to take millions of dollars.”
-
-The professor had been looking after tickets. He soon returned and when
-the train came along they all got in the first-class compartment, which
-was not much better than a very ordinary car at home. The car sat so
-close to the rails that the tops of the wheels had to be bridged over,
-interfering somewhat with the seating capacity.
-
-Soon came a long whistle, the conductor waved his hand and the train
-moved away, through the town and in full view of the ocean. The speed
-was fair, but nothing to what the boys were used to at home, yet this
-was not to be wondered at, for they were climbing steadily along the
-face of the mountain. Up and up they went until Frank, who sat at a
-window overlooking the water hundreds of feet below, could not help but
-shudder.
-
-“If we should drop off here, there wouldn’t be anything left of us,” he
-said to Sam.
-
-“I guess we won’t drop off,” was the reply. “But say, it does make a
-fellow dizzy to look down, doesn’t it?”
-
-The professor sat with them and pointed out several places of interest
-as they sped onward. “You see the tracks follow the mule road in many
-places. The path is about nine miles long and in former days it was the
-only means of communication between Caracas and the sea, outside of an
-old Indian trail further to our right.”
-
-They soon dashed into a tunnel and out again, and then began another
-climb along the mountain side. As they reached a higher elevation they
-noticed that the air was cooler.
-
-“We are coming to another tunnel,” said Mark, as they swung around a
-sharp curve.
-
-“Yes, and we’re running swifter than before,” put in Sam.
-
-The next instant found them in the tunnel, rushing past great masses of
-black rocks. Nothing but smoky lamps lit up the car and Mark was gazing
-at one of these, when of a sudden the train came to such a short stop
-that everybody was pitched forward.
-
-“We’ve struck something,” cried Darry, as he scrambled up from the
-floor, to which he had been hurled.
-
-“Is anybody hurt?” came anxiously from Professor Strong, as soon as the
-shock was over and the car came to a standstill.
-
-“I pinched my hand on the seat,” answered Mark. “But it doesn’t amount
-to anything.”
-
-The passengers were climbing out of the train, to learn the cause of
-the sudden stoppage. They found the train hands gathering about the
-engine and with them was a track-walker who had given them the signal
-to stop.
-
-“There has been a cave-in ahead, he says,” said Professor Strong, after
-listening to the track-walker. “If the train hadn’t stopped we might
-all have been killed.”
-
-The track-walker talked excitedly, in Spanish and in broken English,
-and some of the party went ahead to inspect the cave-in. A large mass
-of rocks had fallen and it was easy to see that the track would not be
-cleared for several hours.
-
-“Now what’s to do?” grumbled Hockley. “I’m sure I don’t want to stay
-boxed up in this tunnel till they clear that stuff away.”
-
-“I don’t see what else we can do,” answered Sam, “unless we walk all
-the way back to La Guayra.”
-
-“How far are we from Caracas?” asked Mark, of one of the passengers.
-
-“About three miles,” was the answer.
-
-“Can’t we walk to that place?” asked Mark, of Professor Strong. “We
-have nothing but our little shoulder valises to carry.”
-
-“I think we can walk it,” said the professor. “I will ask how the track
-ahead is.”
-
-He did so and was informed that, so far as the track-walker knew, it
-was all clear. Accordingly they started out, the professor and Mark
-leading the way and the others following close behind.
-
-They were in the shadow of the mountain so that the fierce rays of
-the sun did not reach them. They had left the tallest portion of the
-mountain behind, so the way was now all more or less down grade.
-
-“I move we get off the railroad track and rest,” said Hockley, after
-half a mile had been covered. “We’re in no especial hurry to get to
-Caracas.”
-
-The professor and the others were willing, and leaving the track they
-found shelter along a hillside covered with tropical trees and bushes.
-As they stepped away from the railroad they heard a humming sound and
-saw a handcar approaching, filled with men and tools, bound for the
-scene of the cave-in.
-
-“They must have telegraphed for those fellows,” said Darry. “They will
-get the road into shape again in short order.”
-
-It was very pleasant to lie under the trees in the shade, and Frank
-was so sleepy that he soon dropped into a doze. Mark walked around
-inspecting the surroundings, and to get a better outlook climbed a
-small cliff which arose not far away.
-
-From the elevation of the cliff Mark could get a good view of the
-valley stretching out in the direction of Caracas and could even see
-some of the white buildings in the distance. Then the youth walked
-along the cliff to where there was a turn, around a series of rough
-rocks.
-
-There had been a heavy dew on the mountain the night before and in the
-shady spots this had not yet dried off. As he made the turn his foot
-trod in some moisture and slipped, and down he went on his knee. He
-tried to save himself by clutching at some vines but these gave way and
-over the cliff he plunged on to some loose rocks below.
-
-Fortunately for Mark, the fall was not a deep one or some bones might
-have been broken. The loose stones and earth gave way beneath his
-weight and allowed him to slide swiftly under the cliff into a long
-and narrow hollow. Here he went with a splash into some water up to
-his knees and some of the dirt and stones came after him, sending the
-moisture all over him.
-
-Mark was so surprised at the turn of affairs that for the moment he
-stood perfectly still, panting for breath. It was dark around him, the
-only light coming from the opening above, which was fully a dozen feet
-over his head. In front of him was the rocky cliff raising itself in
-a curve over his head. Behind him was the wall of dirt. The split, if
-such it may be called, extended a dozen feet in one direction and out
-of sight in the other.
-
-“Now I’m in a pickle and no mistake,” he muttered, dismally. “How in
-the world am I going to get out of this hole?”
-
-The question could not be answered at once and Mark waited until he
-had got back some of his breath. Then he started to move off in the
-direction in which the split led.
-
-He soon found that he was on an uncertain footing, for he had
-progressed less than a dozen feet when he began to sink into the pasty
-ooze of which the bottom of the opening was composed. The water was
-above his knees here and growing deeper.
-
-“No use trying in that direction,” he told himself. “If there was an
-opening the water wouldn’t stand there like that. It’s a regular pocket
-and if I’m not careful I’ll plaster myself so fast that I’ll never get
-out.”
-
-He thought to cry for help but then realized that his friends were a
-good distance off and that even if they heard him they would not know
-exactly how to reach the opening.
-
-“I must help myself,” he murmured. “Surely I ought to be able to climb
-that wall of dirt somehow. Wonder if my pocketknife won’t help me?”
-
-He brought forth the knife and dug the blade into the soil among the
-stones. But it would not hold and merely brought down more of the
-wall at his feet. Then, without warning a big mass of dirt came down,
-hurling him to the bottom of the pocket and covering him completely.
-
-[Illustration: A big mass of dirt came down.]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IX
-
-HOCKLEY SHOWS HIS TRUE COLORS
-
-
-Professor Strong had been studying a guide book which he carried.
-Presently he closed the volume, put it into his pocket, and leaped to
-his feet.
-
-“Come, boys, I think we had better be on our way.”
-
-“I’m ready,” answered Darry, and aroused Frank.
-
-Hockley was close at hand, throwing stones at some birds in a
-neighboring tree. Now he stopped and walked over to the railroad track.
-
-“Where is Mark?”
-
-Several asked the question at the same time, and all looked around for
-their companion.
-
-“I saw him walking towards yonder cliff last,” said Sam. “But that was
-some time ago.”
-
-“Hullo, Mark!” cried Frank. “Where are you?”
-
-No answer came back, and the cry was repeated by Darry and Sam. Then
-the professor shouted, with all the strength of his lungs. Still there
-was no reply.
-
-“This is very strange,” observed the professor, with a serious look on
-his face. “I trust he hasn’t gotten into any trouble. You are sure you
-saw him going toward the cliff, Winthrop?”
-
-“Yes, sir, directly after Frank went to sleep.”
-
-“I’ll go over and take a look around.”
-
-“Let me go with you, please,” said Frank, and he followed and so did
-Sam and Darry. Hockley sat down on the railroad embankment to await
-their return.
-
-Sam pointed out the spot where he had last seen Mark and it did not
-take the crowd long to reach that vicinity. All looked around anxiously.
-
-“He isn’t here, that’s sure,” said Professor Strong. “It’s a mystery
-what became of him.”
-
-“Perhaps he fell over into the bushes below,” suggested Darry.
-
-At this Frank, who loved Mark as a brother, gave a shiver and crawled
-to the edge. But there was nothing below but dirt and tropical vines,
-the latter overrun with big spiders.
-
-“Mark! Mark!” he shouted, and again the others joined in the cry.
-
-“Hark! I heard something!” exclaimed Sam, who had walked nearest to the
-rough rocks where Mark had first slipped. “Listen.”
-
-All did so, with bated breath. A low groan reached their ears, sounding
-as if it had come from the bowels of the earth.
-
-“It’s Mark! He’s surely had a fall!” gasped Frank. He raised his voice:
-“Mark! Mark! Where are you?”
-
-“Here, under the cliff,” was the faint answer, and another groan
-followed.
-
-“Under the cliff?” repeated Professor Strong. He crawled to the edge
-and looked around as Frank had done. “I see no opening, do you?”
-
-“No, sir.”
-
-“The cries come from further up the cliff, in that direction,” said
-Sam, whose ears seemed to be more acute than the rest. “Listen! I think
-he must be in some hole over yonder.”
-
-The professor hurried toward the rough rocks and was soon climbing
-around them. But he was more careful than Mark had been and made the
-turn in safety. He now found himself on another portion of the cliff
-and Mark’s groans came from directly beneath him.
-
-“Mark!” he called out. “Are you below there?”
-
-“I am,” was the answer.
-
-“Are you much hurt?”
-
-“My ankle got a bad twist and I was almost smothered by some dirt
-covering me.”
-
-The professor said no more just then but tried to look over the edge of
-the cliff into the hollow. In this, however, he was unsuccessful.
-
-But Professor Strong was not a man to be daunted easily. When out on
-hunting expeditions he had at various times, gotten into positions of
-extreme peril, and he was used to taking risks. Measuring the distance
-to the dirt hill in front of the cliff, he took a leap and landed in
-safety. He was careful not to go too close to the hole so there was no
-caving-in as there had been when Mark descended.
-
-“Now, then, I’ll see if I can help you out,” said the professor, when
-he caught sight of the youth resting on top of the dirt that had last
-fallen.
-
-“Be careful, or you’ll slide down, too,” answered Mark. “That bank is
-awfully treacherous.”
-
-Leaving the vicinity of the opening Professor Strong began to hunt for
-something by which Mark might be hauled up. But nothing was at hand.
-
-“Have you found him?” came from Frank.
-
-“Yes. He is at the bottom of a deep opening. I will have to haul him
-out if I can find anything to do it with.”
-
-“If only we had a rope,” came from Darry.
-
-Each looked around in perplexity.
-
-“Might try some of the vines by twisting them together,” suggested
-Frank.
-
-“The vines growing around here are not strong enough,” called back the
-professor.
-
-At that moment came a slight rumble from the railroad and at a distance
-another handcar hove into sight, containing several laborers with their
-tools.
-
-“Hi! stop that handcar!” called out Frank to Hockley, who had arisen to
-watch the car pass.
-
-“What for?” demanded the lank youth.
-
-“The professor wants a rope.”
-
-“Stop the car yourself,” muttered Hockley. Nevertheless, when the car
-came near, he waved his hand for the men to stop working the handles
-which kept it in motion.
-
-“What do you want?” asked one of the men, in a Spanish patois, after
-the handcar had been brought to a standstill.
-
-“We want a rope,” said Hockley, without understanding the man.
-
-The man shrugged his shoulders and so did his companions. Then Hockley
-pointed to a rope which laid coiled up on the car. At this the native
-smiled, then looked perplexed.
-
-By this time Professor Strong was hurrying in the direction. He could
-speak the language fairly well and soon made them understand that
-somebody was in a hole and had to be hauled out. Then he held a silver
-piece out and the native, who was a sort of foreman, took it instantly.
-The handcar was taken from the tracks and all the workmen followed the
-professor to the hill in front of the cliff.
-
-When Mark was brought up and placed on the grass, it was found that his
-ankle was so swollen that walking was out of the question. He was wet
-and dirty from head to foot and the others did what they could toward
-cleaning him off. The handcar men could not remain and hurried away as
-soon as they could get back their rope.
-
-“I don’t know what you’re going to do with me,” said Mark, ruefully.
-“I’d walk if I could but I can’t and that’s all there is to it.”
-
-“Does the ankle still hurt when you are resting?” asked the professor
-kindly.
-
-“No, only when I try to stand on it.”
-
-“Then rest where you are and I will see what can be done toward getting
-a horse or some other animal to carry you.”
-
-Professor Strong started off toward the mountain road between La Guayra
-and Caracas, and the others gathered about Mark, bathing his ankle with
-water from a nearby pool and doing all they could otherwise to make him
-comfortable.
-
-“It was a foolish thing to do, attempting to crawl around that cliff,”
-observed Hockley, as he sat by watching proceedings, without offering
-any aid. “You’ve got us all into a muss. Goodness only knows when we’ll
-get to Caracas now.”
-
-“You needn’t wait for us if you don’t wish to,” retorted Frank, stung
-by the lank youth’s harshness. “You can go ahead--I’m sure we shan’t
-miss you.”
-
-“Don’t you talk to me like that, Frank Newton. I won’t stand it!”
-blurted out Hockley, his face reddening.
-
-“I just will talk to you like that, Jake Hockley. Mark didn’t get his
-ankle sprained for fun, and you know it.”
-
-“Oh, let him alone, Frank,” put in Mark. “It isn’t worth quarreling
-about.”
-
-“I suppose you fellows will be getting into trouble right straight
-along,” continued Hockley, who seemed to have one of his streaks of ill
-temper. “I shan’t put up with it, I’ll tell you that.”
-
-“You’ll get into trouble in another minute, if you don’t quit,” cried
-Frank. “The best thing you can do is to go on to Caracas and leave us
-alone.”
-
-“That’s all you fellows want--to get clear of me,” growled the lank
-youth. “But you can’t do it. My father’s paying my way, and I’m going
-to do as I please, and I’m not going to allow Professor Strong to
-consult you and not me in everything either,” he went on, bitterly.
-
-As he finished speaking he started to move from one side of the little
-crowd to the other. He passed close to Mark and as he did so his foot
-hit the swollen ankle and made the youth on the ground cry out with
-pain.
-
-“Oh, Hockley, what did you do that for?”
-
-“I--er--I didn’t mean to do it,” answered the lank youth, surlily.
-
-“You did mean to do it, you mean bully!” ejaculated Frank, who had
-seen the movement perfectly. And in a sudden rage he ran up and shoved
-Hockley backward into some brushwood. “If you try it again, I’ll fight
-you, small as I am.”
-
-It took the lank youth a few seconds to recover and then his face was
-redder than ever. Without a word he darted for Frank and struck him
-heavily in the shoulder. Then he struck out again, but Frank dodged the
-blow. A moment more and the two had clinched and were rolling over and
-over on the ground.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER X
-
-ON MULE BACK INTO CARACAS
-
-
-“A fight! A fight!” came from Sam.
-
-“Give it to him, Frank, don’t let him get the best of you,” put in
-Darry.
-
-“Stop them,” ordered Mark, trying to rise and then falling back with a
-groan of pain. “Stop them, I say. Glummy is too big for Frank.”
-
-“You let us alone,” growled the bully. “This is our fight and we’ll
-settle it between us. He struck me first.”
-
-While he was talking he was doing his best to get on top of Frank. But
-the latter, though small, proved that he was powerful and Hockley held
-him down with difficulty. The lank youth now hit out again and Frank
-was struck in the nose and the blood began to flow from that organ.
-
-“Let me up!” came from the smaller youth. And then he too struck out,
-landing on Hockley’s chin. Then he jerked the lank youth by the arm
-and Hockley rolled over on the grass, and in a moment Frank was on top.
-
-“Get off!” howled the bully, in a terrible rage over being thus brought
-to earth. “Get off, or I’ll hammer the life out of you!”
-
-“You’ve got to spell able first,” retorted Frank and struck him in the
-cheek. “There’s one for stepping on Mark’s ankle and there’s another to
-teach you manners.” He struck out heavily. Then Hockley pulled him over
-and they laid side by side panting and striking and each endeavoring to
-rise.
-
-Suddenly Frank saw his chance and struck the bully directly in the
-mouth. The blow was delivered with all the force possible and it
-loosened one of Hockley’s teeth and made it bleed.
-
-“Hurrah! Good for Frank!” cried Sam. “That’s the sort.”
-
-“Hi! hi! what does this mean, boys?” The call came from the brushwood
-close at hand. “Stop that fighting instantly!”
-
-The voice was that of Professor Strong, and both Frank and Hockley
-lost no time in leaping to their feet. They stepped apart and it must
-be confessed that Frank looked at the instructor rather shamefacedly.
-Hockley was defiant.
-
-“What have you boys been fighting about?” demanded Professor Strong, as
-he came up and gazed at one and the other sternly.
-
-“Newton started it,” answered Hockley. “He tackled me without any
-reason for it.”
-
-“That isn’t true,” cried Frank. “He kicked Mark’s sore ankle and that
-made me mad, and I told him what a brute he was, and shoved him back
-out of the way. Then he struck me in the shoulder.”
-
-“It isn’t so, he hit me first,” said Hockley, surlily.
-
-“What Frank says is true,” put in Darry. “He did kick Mark’s lame
-ankle, and that was a shame.”
-
-“How about this?” questioned the professor, of Mark.
-
-“He struck my ankle when he was walking past, sir. He said it was an
-accident, but----”
-
-“It wasn’t,” broke in Frank. “I saw him do it on purpose.”
-
-“Hockley’s been aching for a quarrel ever since he started,” came from
-Sam.
-
-“The whole crowd is down on me,” growled the lank youth. “They want
-to run things to suit themselves and leave me out in the cold. My
-father pays my way and I don’t see why I should play second fiddle to
-anybody.”
-
-“You will not be asked to play second fiddle, as you term it, Hockley,”
-said the professor. “But at the same time I will allow no fighting. We
-are here to see the sights, and I expect you all to behave like young
-gentlemen. If you did not kick Mark in the ankle on purpose you should
-at least have been more careful of your steps, for a sprained ankle
-is nothing to fool with. I see your mouth is bleeding. You had better
-bathe it in yonder pool. And Newton, you go to the next pool and bathe
-your nose, and remember, this is the first and last fighting to be done
-on this trip.”
-
-Glad to get off thus easily the two boys walked away as directed and
-each did what he could to stop the flow of blood. Sam and Darry wanted
-to go after Frank but the professor stopped them.
-
-“I want you two to help me with Mark,” said Professor Strong. “I have
-found a native with several mules. He was carrying cane cuttings to
-Caracas, but I have hired him to drop his loads for the present and
-carry us instead. If you will join hands and catch Mark under the knees
-I will take him under the arms, and we can carry him to the road.”
-
-They soon had the crippled youth up and the professor pointed out the
-direction in which the road over the mountain lay. The path to the
-point was thickly overgrown with brush and they had literally to force
-their way along. It was rough and more than once Mark felt like crying
-out but showed his grit by shutting his teeth and keeping silent.
-
-Frank soon followed the three and Hockley did the same. The bully
-presently ranged up beside the smaller youth.
-
-“Just you wait, I’ll get square yet,” he said, in a low tone.
-
-“I’m not afraid of you,” retorted Frank, who was satisfied that he had
-fully “kept up his end of the log,” as the saying is.
-
-“The next time we come to blows I’ll not be so easy on you,” went on
-Hockley. He was very angry to think that the smaller boy had not been
-afraid of him.
-
-“Perhaps I won’t be so easy either, Hockley,” was Frank’s answer, and
-then he ran on, to aid the others in getting Mark to the mule path.
-
-Down on the path they found the native, a little, dried-up old
-Venezuelan, who had seven mules in his charge. The patient little
-beasts were scarcely higher than Darry’s shoulder. Four had been
-unloaded but the others stood in the road with loads of sugarcane
-cuttings so large that only their eyes and noses could be seen.
-
-“Gracious what loads!” murmured Darry, as he gazed at the mules.
-
-“These mules will carry about all you can put on them,” said the
-professor, with a smile. “I have seen one mule carrying three men, and
-trotting along at that.”
-
-The mules to be used by our friends were soon ready, and then Mark was
-placed on the back of the one the native said was the best. Presently
-all were “aboard,” as Darry expressed it, and the native led the
-procession in the direction of Caracas.
-
-They could already see the outskirts of the city, which is located
-on the southern slope of the La Silla Mountain. To every side were
-mountain peaks, with here and there a small valley with streams of
-water of more or less importance. On the sides of the mule path were
-plantains and palms, and further out the sugar and coffee plantations,
-with their queer little huts and houses of pink, blue, and white.
-
-“How large a place is Caracas?” questioned Sam, as they moved along as
-rapidly as Mark’s condition permitted.
-
-“There has been no accurate census taken for years, but the population
-is probably 75,000 souls. You see the laboring classes--called peons
-here--object to being enumerated for fear it may mean military service,
-and so they hide when the census man comes around. The whole valley in
-which the city lies numbers probably 150,000 souls.”
-
-“The houses look a good deal alike to me,” observed Sam, as they made
-their way down one of the highways leading directly to the Plaza
-Bolivar, a park in the center of Caracas. “They all have mud and
-plaster walls, red-tiled roofs, windows with bars over them and no
-chimneys.”
-
-“Yes, I noticed the absence of chimneys,” put in Frank, whose nose had
-now stopped bleeding. “Wonder what they do when they want fire in a
-house?”
-
-“They never want fire,” answered Professor Strong. “It is too warm for
-a fire. That is why they don’t have glass to the windows.”
-
-“But they must cook.”
-
-“They do, but they use charcoal and burn it in a little contrivance
-something like a tinsmith’s stove. You’ll see plenty of them before you
-leave for home.”
-
-“They seem to paint their houses all colors,” muttered Hockley, who now
-that Frank had spoken felt he too must say something. “There is a blue
-and a white, and there is a red, and here is a brown, and over yonder
-an orange.”
-
-“Yes they use any color they please,” answered the professor. “It is
-sometimes the only way of telling one’s house from that of a neighbor.
-They may look ugly to you from the outside, but you’ll find many of
-them quite handsome and very comfortable within.”
-
-They had now entered the city proper and the sights and sounds around
-them interested the boys so much that they forgot to talk. Natives were
-hurrying by with huge bundles on their heads or balanced over their
-shoulders, little children with hardly any clothes were playing in the
-roadway, and the street was almost filled with pedlers and others on
-mule back. At one spot they encountered a native driving several cows.
-
-“He’s delivering his milk,” said the professor. “He finds out how much
-a customer wants and then milks one of his cows to that extent.”
-
-“Then the milk ought to be fresh and rich,” said Mark, who had found
-the ride surprisingly comfortable despite the awkward appearance of his
-steed.
-
-“It is fresh enough, but not particularly rich, for the cows roam where
-they please and rarely get enough to eat.”
-
-“I should think a fellow would get all mixed up in a city where the
-houses are so much alike,” said Sam.
-
-“You won’t get mixed after you get the run of the place, Winthrop.
-Remember that all the streets start from the cathedral at the Plaza
-Bolivar. The four streets there are called Avenue North, East, South,
-and West, and then follow Second Street North, Second Street East, and
-so on.”
-
-A few minutes more of riding brought them to the hotel at which they
-were to remain during their stop in Caracas. The professor went inside
-and announced their arrival and then the boys and he assisted Mark to
-alight. They passed through a large iron gateway into a beautiful
-square filled with flowers, where a fountain was playing. Then a
-servant came to lead them to their rooms, which were all on the ground
-floor, and in a few minutes more they could truly say they were at home
-in Caracas.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XI
-
-THE PROFESSOR MEETS AN OLD FRIEND
-
-
-“How does the ankle feel?” asked Frank, on the morning following the
-arrival at the hotel.
-
-“Somewhat sore, but I can stand on it,” answered Mark. “I guess it will
-be all right again in a day or two;” and it was, although Mark was
-careful of the member for some time longer.
-
-Under the guidance of the professor the boys made several tours of the
-city. They first visited the Capitol building, but a short distance
-from their hotel. The Capitol is but one story high, but it occupies an
-entire square, and is by far the finest building in Venezuela. In the
-center is a large court, where a fountain plays constantly and where
-grow the most beautiful of tropical flowers. Here are a number of rich
-marble statues.
-
-Opening up from the court are the various official offices--the Senate
-and Chamber of Deputies, Interior and War Departments, Supreme Court,
-and others. At one end is a large hall, two hundred feet long, with
-inlaid flooring, where public receptions are held. Here can also be
-found the portraits of various notables of Venezuelan history.
-
-“This is Simon Bolivar, the Washington of South America,” said the
-professor, as they stopped in front of a massive portrait at the end
-of the gallery. “He was born in this city in 1783, of wealthy parents
-of rank, and was sent to Spain to be educated. He became a lawyer
-and traveled extensively. While visiting the United States he became
-infused with the spirit of liberty, and returning home joined the
-patriots who were trying to throw off the yoke of Spain. He fought
-in a number of battles and then went to England to ask for aid from
-that country. But England would grant him nothing, and to escape the
-wrath of Spain he had to flee to Curaçao. But he was not disheartened,
-and soon after returned to South America. He began to raise troops of
-volunteers, and fought many more battles, in nearly all of which he
-was victorious. At last in 1813, he entered Caracas as a conqueror,
-was hailed as a liberator, and made absolute dictator in civil and
-military affairs. More battles followed, and Bolivar had to flee again,
-this time to Hayti. But he was undaunted, and coming back whipped the
-Spaniards once more and helped to unite New Granada and Venezuela into
-the Republic of Colombia. After that he went to Peru and aided the
-Peruvians in establishing their freedom and a part of the country was
-named Bolivia in his honor. He died in 1842.”
-
-“Certainly a great man,” said Darry. “What a lot of excitement he must
-have passed through!”
-
-“He certainly did. At first he was but little appreciated, but as time
-goes by the people realize what a truly great man he was.”
-
-“There is a statue of him in Central Park, New York,” put in Frank. “I
-have seen it a number of times, and so has Mark.”
-
-“You will find statues of Bolivar all over South America and also in
-Central America and Mexico. When the folks here realized what he had
-done for them, they went wild, and his ashes were brought here with
-great pomp and ceremony. He is undoubtedly the foremost figure in South
-American history for three hundred years.”
-
-Professor Strong had received a pass to the Senate Chamber, and they
-took a brief look at this somewhat bare apartment, with its stiff
-chairs, and its absence of regular desks.
-
-“Does the President get much?” asked Hockley, as they came to a halt
-out in the court where the fountain was playing.
-
-“I believe his salary is $12,000 a year. Besides this he gets his house
-and servants free, also his livery, the same as our own President. But
-you must remember that the President here is a good deal of a dictator
-and can use the money of the government pretty much as he pleases.
-Sometimes a president draws money to suit himself, and then comes a
-revolution. This is not alone true of Venezuela, but it is true of many
-other South American republics.”
-
-Before leaving the Capitol building they looked in at the Treasury
-Department, and Frank asked about the money of the country.
-
-“I’ve got some of their silver, but I must say I can’t tell what it
-is,” he said.
-
-“Well, this is a bolivar,” said the professor, taking a silver piece
-somewhat smaller than our quarter from his pocket. “This bolivar is
-worth twenty cents. The next smaller coin is a real, worth ten cents.
-Then comes a medio, five cents, a quartillo, two-and-a-half cents, and
-a centavo, which explains itself.”
-
-“But isn’t there anything larger than a bolivar?” asked Darry.
-
-“Yes, there are two and two-and-a-half bolivars, and a peso fuerte,
-which is worth one dollar. After that come the gold coins, worth four
-dollars and twenty dollars. I will show you all of them when we get
-back to the hotel.”
-
-Leaving the Capitol, they crossed the square to a beautiful building of
-white marble. This is the Central University, the leading institution
-of learning of the Republic.
-
-“This is not a large college as such institutions are counted in our
-country,” said the professor. “There are, I was told, about thirty
-professors and the students number about 400. But the course of study
-is very thorough, and embraces literature, art, law, medicine, science,
-engineering and theology. Here is also located the National Library of
-forty-five thousand volumes, many of which are rare and valuable. We
-will walk through, for I am inclined to think there is a professor here
-with whom I am well acquainted.”
-
-They walked through the library building first, with its long shelves
-of books and its cabinets of rare folios, and then into the college
-proper. Here the professor hailed a passing student and asked
-concerning his friend.
-
-“_Si, señor_, he is here,” said the student, in Spanish. “He teaches
-our class in engineering. Would you like to see him?”
-
-“I would indeed,” answered Professor Strong. “He and I were college
-students together.”
-
-“Then follow me to the class room. He is at his desk. The session has
-not yet begun.”
-
-Passing through a long and high corridor, they came to one of the
-class-rooms and entered. At a tall desk at one end sat a man of
-forty-five, working out a problem on a sheet of paper. He was evidently
-a Spaniard but one who had seen a great deal of the world.
-
-“How are you, Morano,” said the professor, stepping up and touching him
-on the arm.
-
-The professor in engineering started up and stared for a moment. Then
-his face broke out into a warm smile, and he caught Professor Strong in
-both arms after the fashion of many foreigners.
-
-“Strong, my own very dear friend, Amos Strong!” he cried, in a rich
-Spanish accent. “Where in the world have you come from, and when did
-you arrive? It is wonderful! I am so glad! You are yourself, but you
-look older. And these boys? Some of your sons perhaps?” And he took the
-professor’s hands and shook them over and over again.
-
-“I am glad to see you, Morano,” was the professor’s equally warm reply.
-“It is fully fifteen years since we parted, in Paris, after a tour of
-the Old World. I tried to see you when I was here before, but you were
-down in Peru, helping to build a railroad bridge.”
-
-“Yes, that is so, I remember now. I could not stand it to teach--it is
-so hard, so steady, so confining. Outside it is different. One gets the
-air, one can walk about, and one is more happy. Then these are your
-sons? What are their names?”
-
-“No, they are not my sons. I am not married.”
-
-“Indeed! A happy bachelor. So am I. Then they are----?”
-
-“They are my pupils. I have brought them to South America to show them
-something of the country.” The professor brought each one forward and
-mentioned his name. “Boys, this is Professor Enrique Morano, a very
-dear friend of mine, who once attended Yale with me, and who afterward
-made a tour of Europe with me and several other students.”
-
-“I am charmed to meet so many from the dear United States,” said
-Professor Morano, as he shook hands all around. “It is a great country
-and I am sorry I could not remain in it longer. But my respected
-father--peace to his ashes!--wished me to return.”
-
-“Then your father is dead?” asked Professor Strong.
-
-“Yes, he died but four months ago. He took a trip to Nicaragua, and the
-journey was too hard for him. He left me utterly alone. But I should
-not bother you with my family afflictions. You are of course stopping
-in Caracas.”
-
-“Yes,” and Professor Strong mentioned the hotel.
-
-“You must come to my home--it is just outside of the city, on the road
-to Valencia. I am alone there with the servants and I will be pleased
-to have company, and doubly pleased that it is you. You must make the
-home your own.”
-
-“We shall be pleased to call,” said Professor Strong.
-
-“Why cannot you go there this evening, after the session is over here?”
-urged Enrique Morano. “We must talk of old times, must we not? Your
-pupils can inspect the coffee plantation which my late father purchased
-just before he died. It is now mine, but I must confess I know not
-what to do with it. I am no planter. I am but a civil engineer and--a
-hunter, like yourself,” and the Spanish teacher laughed.
-
-“We will go, and gladly,” answered Amos Strong. “I wish the boys to
-examine a coffee plantation thoroughly.”
-
-“Will you be at the hotel at five o’clock? If so I will send my
-carriage for you.”
-
-So it was arranged, and in a moment more they left the class room, for
-while the conversation was going on the place had been filling with
-pupils, many of whom stared curiously at the strangers.
-
-“A nice man,” was Darry’s comment when they were outside. He turned to
-the professor: “I don’t wonder you took to him for a college friend.”
-
-“There is no better man than Henry Morano,” was Amos Strong’s reply. “I
-liked him from the first. He is a splendid scholar and an equally good
-hunter in the bargain. You can rest assured of a good time when you are
-in his company. We are very fortunate in meeting him.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XII
-
-MARKEL AGAIN TO THE FRONT
-
-
-“We will now go over to the City Hall,” said Professor Strong, when
-they found themselves in the Plaza once more. “It is a spot full of
-interest, especially for all people of South America, for it was to
-them the Cradle of Liberty, the same as our Independence Hall at
-Philadelphia.”
-
-The building was but a step away, an ancient looking affair, with thick
-adobe walls and small slits of windows. The rooms are, many of them,
-small and uncomfortable, and the decorations tawdry to a degree.
-
-“Independence was proclaimed here on July 5th, 1811,” said Professor
-Strong, as they entered a council chamber located at one corner. “Here
-the very best representatives of the country assembled to throw off
-the yoke of Spain. Yonder is a faded picture depicting the event, and
-the important looking document on the wall opposite is the declaration
-itself. The paper was drawn up by Francisco Miranda, an able leader,
-especially civilly, although he was not so successful in the battle
-field as Simon Bolivar. Miranda was a great friend to La Fayette, and
-when La Fayette sailed to America Miranda went with him and served
-all through the Revolutionary War under Washington. This planted in
-his breast the same seed of liberty that was planted in the breast of
-Bolivar.”
-
-“That shows how far-reaching was the influence of our Revolution,”
-remarked Sam. “We threw that tea overboard to some purpose, didn’t we?”
-
-“What is this thing?” asked Hockley, pointing to a faded banner hanging
-close at hand.
-
-“That is a relic of Pizarro at the time he went to conquer Peru. He
-carried that banner all through his trail of fire and blood, doing it
-in the name of the church, but with a cruelty only equaled by the worst
-of savages. This is not the whole of the banner. It was cut in half and
-the other portion is in the National Museum at Bogota.”
-
-An hour was spent at the City Hall viewing other objects of interest,
-including the great city marriage register and the various portraits on
-the walls. Then they walked past the Municipal Theater and on to the
-new market place, a neat building with cement floor, where the stalls
-were divided by lattice-work.
-
-“There is another market place,” said Professor Strong, “and at present
-business is divided between the two. At the other place there are no
-stalls, but the traders simply lay their stuff in a heap on the ground
-and sit beside it.”
-
-“How nice the vegetables and fruits look!” exclaimed Frank. “I never
-saw anything fresher.”
-
-“They have fresh vegetables the year around here, for they will grow at
-any time the seed is put in the ground. They are all picked at night or
-early in the morning and brought to the market on mule or donkey back.
-You can see for yourself that they have all the ordinary vegetables
-with which we are acquainted. They also have others, like for instance
-that yucca, and the arrowroot, bread-fruit, and many kinds of bananas
-and delicious pineapples.”
-
-“There is an alligator pear,” said Mark. “I’ve seen them on some
-high-toned fruit stands in New York.”
-
-“The native name is aguacate. Did you notice the size of the
-muskmelons? They are just as sweet as they look, and those big, long
-whitish peas will melt like butter in your mouth.”
-
-It was now growing hot, and they were glad enough to leave the market
-place and go back to the hotel. As they rambled around they had met
-many natives going to or coming from business, some faultlessly dressed
-in white duck suits and broad Panama hats. Many of the hats were
-exceedingly fine in texture.
-
-“I once owned one that I used at times for six years,” said the
-professor, speaking of the hats. “I could jam it in anywhere and it
-always came forth looking as good as ever. But it cost me thirty-five
-dollars.”
-
-“Phew! that’s rather steep,” cried Darry. “But I’ve heard of such big
-prices before.”
-
-The boys had found the service at the hotel of the best. The servants
-were numerous and did everything with a gravity which at times was to
-them almost comical. They were very attentive to all details, and the
-guests were not permitted to do a single thing for themselves.
-
-“My gracious, I think they would eat for me if I asked them,” said
-Darry. “Never saw such waiters in my life. That fellow pushed my chair
-around for me, held the glass of water, handed the bill of fare and
-didn’t give me a chance to lay it down, and held the butter pat while
-I buttered my bread. It goes ahead of anything I ever experienced
-before.”
-
-“Reckon they’re laying back for tips,” growled Hockley. “I’ve heard
-that all these foreign fellows think they can sponge on the Yankees
-every time.”
-
-“You won’t have to tip them,” answered Professor Strong, dryly. “I will
-attend to that when I settle our bills.”
-
-“Oh, I don’t mind tipping them,” answered the lank youth, hastily. “I
-always give the waiters something at home.”
-
-After lunch the whole party took it easy in the court by the fountain,
-where there were numerous easy chairs and hammocks. Mark and Frank fell
-asleep, and soon after Darry and Sam followed. But Hockley was restless
-and at last got up to walk around.
-
-He had just entered the office of the hotel when the clerk came toward
-him holding up an envelope.
-
-“A message for Mistair Jacob Hockley,” he said.
-
-“That’s my name,” returned Hockley, and took the message wondering whom
-it was from and what it contained.
-
-It was a cablegram, sent from Curaçao, and was signed “Daniel Markel.”
-It read as follows:
-
- “Unexpectedly delayed. Coming to-morrow. Meet me at Hotel Ziroda.”
-
-“So he was delayed and is coming to-morrow,” muttered Hockley, as he
-gazed at the cablegram. “Hullo, it’s dated yesterday. In that case
-he’ll be at the Hotel Ziroda to-day. I’d like to know what he has to
-say for himself.”
-
-Stuffing the message in his pocket he went up to the clerk and asked
-that individual where the Hotel Ziroda was located. Receiving the
-information he started to go back to where he had left the professor,
-then suddenly changed his mind.
-
-“He may refuse me if I ask him about going,” he mused. “I’d better go
-and say nothing.” And off he started, bent on seeing Dan Markel and
-learning what the man from Baltimore had to say for himself.
-
-The Hotel Ziroda was an ancient hostelry, square in shape, with a small
-arched doorway leading to the inevitable court inside. It had seen
-better days and was far from prosperous. A greasy landlord sat in a
-wicker chair, half asleep, and with a lighted cigar hanging from his
-teeth.
-
-“Hullo, are you the proprietor?” asked Hockley, touching him on the
-arm.
-
-“What do you want?” asked the man, in Spanish, as he tried to rouse up.
-
-“I say, are you the proprietor?”
-
-“_Si, señor._”
-
-“Is there a man here by the name of Markel--Daniel Markel? He came from
-Willemstad yesterday?”
-
-“_Si, señor._ Markel, _señor_, he ees here. Come, I show you.”
-
-With a profound sigh the hotel man arose and conducted Hockley through
-the dirty court to a room in one corner of the building. He knocked and
-a voice inside called out: “Who’s there?”
-
-“It’s me,” answered Hockley, without regard to grammar.
-
-“Me, who?”
-
-“Hockley. I just got your cablegram.”
-
-“Oh!” Markel leaped from the bed upon which he had been lying and
-opened the door. “Glad to see you. Come in,” and Hockley went in, and
-the hotel proprietor left the pair to themselves.
-
-The room was large and scantily furnished, with a bed, washstand, table
-and one chair. On the table stood Markel’s valise, a bottle of liquor
-and a glass, and a box of cigars. The room was half full of smoke and
-smelt far from pleasant.
-
-“Never so sorry in all my life,” said the man from Baltimore, as he
-drew up the chair for Hockley to sit down while he sank on the edge of
-the bed. “I suppose you thought I had given you the go by.” He glanced
-keenly at the lank youth to see the effect of his words.
-
-“I--I didn’t know what to think,” stammered Hockley.
-
-“When I found the steamer gone I was fairly wild, Hockley, indeed I
-was. I said to myself, ‘He’ll think I’m a thief sure, for I’ve a cool
-half hundred of his money.’ I wanted to send you word, but I was so
-upset I forgot about the cable until afterwards. Here, have a drink and
-I’ll tell you all about it.”
-
-He handed Hockley the bottle and the glass, and the youth had not the
-courage to resist. He took a small drink of the fiery stuff, which
-fairly burnt his throat as he swallowed it.
-
-“Well, how did it happen?” he questioned.
-
-“It was a funny thing. I went ashore to transact a little business with
-an old Dutch importer who used to do business with a firm that can
-oysters in Baltimore. Well, while I was in the place two natives came
-in and another native followed. First thing I knew one of the first
-natives had picked the other’s pocket. The man who was robbed accused
-the third native of the crime. There was a big row and they were going
-to carry off the innocent man to jail when I stepped up and told the
-old Dutchman how it was and what I had seen. A policeman was called,
-and as a consequence I had to go to the station house and remain there
-all night as a witness to the affair. I tried my best to get away and
-to send you word, but I couldn’t do a thing with those sleepy Dutch
-officials. They left me to my misery and there I had to remain until
-ten o’clock the next morning. Then the case came up and what do you
-think? Nobody made any charge and everybody was dismissed: Disgusted?
-Well, of course I was, but what could I do?”
-
-“It was enough to make anybody mad,” was Hockley’s comment.
-
-“I threatened to sue the city for false imprisonment, but they only
-laughed at me. So then I hunted up a vessel bound for La Guayra and
-finally sent the cablegram--and here I am. How have you been?”
-
-“Oh, I’m well enough.”
-
-“Seen anything of the city?”
-
-“Yes, the professor has piloted us to one place and another. But it’s
-mighty slow looking at old buildings and documents and pictures, I
-didn’t come for that. I came for a good time.”
-
-“Right you are, and a good time you shall have, so long as we are
-together. I promised to show you the ins and outs of Caracas and I’m
-going to do it,” concluded Dan Markel as he slapped Hockley on the
-back. “We’ll paint the town red, eh?”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIII
-
-A PLANTATION HOME IN VENEZUELA
-
-
-“Guess I’ve been asleep, and guess the others have been asleep, too.”
-
-It was Frank who uttered the words as he roused up and rubbed his
-eyes. Mark was still sleeping and Darry and Sam had just stirred like
-himself. The professor was dozing with a guide book resting on his
-lap. Everything around the hotel was quiet, only the dripping of the
-fountain breaking the stillness.
-
-“It’s a sleepy man’s land during midday,” remarked Darry, as he arose
-slowly to his feet. “The air takes all the ambition out of a fellow. I
-don’t wonder that no business is transacted excepting during the early
-morning and late in the afternoon.”
-
-The boys walked around the hotel and then into the street beyond. A
-few natives were moving about, but that was all. The sun, striking the
-pavement, made the place like a furnace, and they were glad to retreat
-once more to the shelter of the court.
-
-“Where is Hockley?” asked Professor Strong, as he, too, roused up.
-
-“I don’t know,” answered Darry, and the others said the same.
-
-“Perhaps he is taking a look around on his own account,” suggested
-Mark. “He said something about wanting to see the lumber yards, so that
-he could write to his father and tell him how they handled lumber down
-here.”
-
-“They handle it here very much as they do everywhere else in South
-America,” answered the professor. “Some is carried on wagons, but a
-great deal is transported on the backs of mules.”
-
-“How can a mule carry a long stick of timber?” asked Frank. “If he
-carried it sideways it would more than block the street.”
-
-“They use two or more mules and it is wonderful how they balance the
-loads. Then, too, the natives carry a great lot of things on their
-shoulders and heads.”
-
-“What are the real natives?” asked Darry. “I’ve seen all sorts of
-people here--white, black, red, and mixed.”
-
-“The real natives are the Indians, Crane,” returned the professor, with
-a smile. “They lived here long before the days of Columbus, just as
-they inhabited our own country. Next to the Indians come the Spaniards
-who were the first settlers. The Spaniards introduced the negroes, who
-came from Africa and from the West Indies as slaves. The intermixture
-of these races have produced the mestizoes, who are of Spanish and
-Indian blood, the mulattoes, of negro and creole blood, and the zambos,
-of negro and Indian blood. These people are also intermixed, so that it
-is sometimes impossible to tell what a person is.”
-
-“Like the man in New York who came up to be naturalized,” said Mark.
-“His father was an Englishman and his mother a Frenchwoman. His
-grandfather had been born in Germany and his grandmother in Italy. He
-had emigrated to Canada and there married a Canadian Indian woman. Then
-he had moved down to New York, and his oldest daughter had married an
-Irishman. If they have any children it will be hard to tell what they
-will be.” And there was a general laugh at this sally.
-
-“They’ll be Americans,” said Frank. “Uncle Sam’s flag is wide and broad
-enough to cover them all, if they care to come under the folds of Old
-Glory.”
-
-At last came the hour when Enrique Morano’s carriage could be expected
-and soon a fine turnout hove into sight, drawn by a team of white
-horses.
-
-“That’s as fine a carriage as any in Central Park,” said Frank.
-
-“It is probably of United States manufacture,” answered the professor.
-“We export a great number of vehicles to South America.”
-
-“Evidently they appreciate good horseflesh,” put in Mark. “Here come a
-couple of horsemen now. The town is beginning to wake up.”
-
-The horsemen dashed by in a spirited manner, clad in white with broad
-sashes at their waists, and wearing sweeping hats which flapped
-gracefully in the warm wind. In the rear rode an attendant, carrying a
-small hamper filled with refreshments.
-
-As Hockley was not at hand, the professor asked the driver of the
-carriage to wait a little, while he took a look around the square. But
-the youth was nowhere to be seen and Professor Strong came back looking
-somewhat worried.
-
-“He knew when we were to leave,” he said. “I can’t understand this.”
-
-“Oh, Hockley takes his time about everything,” put in Sam. “He said he
-was down here for pleasure, and that he was going to suit himself.”
-
-“He has no right to keep the whole party waiting,” answered the
-professor briefly. He said no more, but his eyes showed that his mind
-was busy.
-
-“Hockley will get a lecture when he shows up,” whispered Frank to Darry.
-
-“He’ll get only what he deserves, Darry. Isn’t that so, Beans?”
-
-“To be sure,” came from Sam. “He howled about us delaying him at the
-railroad cliff; now he’s doing the same thing himself.”
-
-Quarter of an hour went by and the boys wondered if the professor would
-make them give up the trip if Hockley did not return. Then came a
-messenger with a note for Professor Strong. The note was from Hockley
-and ran as follows:
-
- “DEAR PROFESSOR STRONG: Have just met some old friends of my father,
- and they wish me to spend the evening with them as they are bound
- for Philadelphia to-morrow. Please excuse me from going to that
- plantation with you. Will be at the hotel when you get back.”
-
-“Hockley has met some friends and wishes to stay with them a few
-hours,” said the professor. “We will go without him.”
-
-“I’m just as well satisfied,” murmured Mark, but in a low voice, so
-that Professor Strong did not hear him.
-
-They were soon seated in the carriage, the negro driver touched up the
-pair, and away they rolled, down the smooth street, around a corner of
-the public square and on toward the road leading to Valencia, which is
-located on the lake of the same name, and on the line of a railroad
-between the two points.
-
-“When I was here before, the railroad ran no further than Victory, a
-two days’ drive in a carriage,” said the professor, when Caracas was
-left behind and they found themselves climbing over the hills on a road
-lined with beautiful tropical trees. “Now one can go straight through
-to Valencia and also part of the way around the lake. There is also a
-railroad from Valencia to Puerto Cabello, on the seacoast, west of La
-Guayra, and a steamer runs every ten days between the two seaports.”
-
-“I don’t see much but coffee plantations around here,” observed Mark.
-
-“Coffee and cocoa is the great industry in this valley, for Caracas
-affords an easy market for shipments. Caracas chocolate, made from the
-cocoa bean, is known everywhere, and so is Maracaibo coffee.”
-
-“Hockley was saying that Mocha coffee came from here,” put in Frank.
-“But I said it came from Arabia.”
-
-“So it does come from Arabia. But there is a kind of coffee grown here
-which is a good deal like Mocha in flavor and is often sold as such.”
-
-“I’d like to know something about coffee raising,” put in Darry. “We
-drink so much of the stuff that I think we ought to know about it.”
-
-“I will explain when we get to Professor Morano’s plantation.”
-
-An hour’s drive from Caracas brought them to the entrance of the
-plantation and they passed through a wide gateway along a broad and
-well kept path lined with giant palms. Between the palms were urns of
-flowers, all blooming in red, yellow and blue. Trailing vines were
-also in evidence, and they covered the stone wall which separated the
-plantation from the highway.
-
-The plantation house proved to be an old and substantial affair,
-one story in height, and occupying the space of a small city block.
-The outside was decorated with stucco work painted in pale blue and
-yellow. There was the usual archway in front, over which was erected a
-lattice-work covered with trailing plants.
-
-The civil engineer, for such Enrique Morano really was, was already
-there to receive them, in spotless white, even to the tie with a
-diamond which he wore.
-
-“Welcome, three times welcome to all of you!” he cried, gaily, as he
-ran forward and assisted Professor Strong to alight. “You have given me
-a great pleasure by coming, and while you stay you must make yourselves
-perfectly at home.”
-
-“Thank you, we will, Morano,” answered the professor.
-
-They were soon inside the building, which was built, like so many
-others, in the form of a hollow square. The patio was a garden of
-flowers, with a single giant palm in the center. There was a broad
-veranda running entirely around the house, with two steps at either
-side of the passage leading to the outside. The flooring of the veranda
-was of two kinds of wood, laid in fancy designs.
-
-“Come into the parlor,” said Enrique Morano, and led the way into an
-apartment facing the highway beyond. It was a room at least twenty feet
-square, with a polished floor partly covered with rugs. The furniture
-was of hardwoods, elaborately carved but without any fixed coverings.
-
-“Not so very different from a summer parlor at home,” whispered Frank,
-when they were left alone for a moment.
-
-“They don’t cover the furniture on account of the bugs and insects,”
-said the professor.
-
-Opening up from the parlor was a library and smoking room. Enrique
-Morano had furnished this to suit himself, and it was very much in the
-style of a rich college man at Princeton or Yale. There was a case of
-books and files of the latest papers and magazines, and also a case
-containing cigars, cigarettes, smoking tobacco and pipes.
-
-“A regular den!” cried Professor Strong, his face brightening. “And
-just as you had it in the olden days.”
-
-“It reminds me of good old times,” answered Enrique Morano. “Those
-college days! I shall never forget them, nor the many friends I made in
-the United States.”
-
-He asked them to sit down, while he offered the professor a cigar.
-The boys were glad enough to look over the files of native papers and
-Spanish magazines, although they could read but little. There were _El
-Diario de Caracas_, the leading daily of the capital, _El Pregonero_,
-another daily, and a magazine with some reproductions of pictures from
-American and foreign weeklies.
-
-“What funny advertisements,” said Mark, as he spelt one and another
-out. “Here is a store that has for sale American sewing machines of the
-latest fashions, and another that sells clothing that will make a man
-look like a President.”
-
-While Professor Strong and his old friend were smoking and conversing
-the boys were told to roam through the house at will, and this they
-did. Next to the library they found a dining hall, long and broad, with
-a table in the center which was so heavy none of the boys could budge
-it. Here the tableware was of solid silver and of the finest cut glass.
-
-Passing from the dining hall, they entered a narrow corridor, with
-bed chambers on either side. Here the windows were covered with
-bamboo or venetian blinds. All of the beds stood in the center of
-the apartments, never against a wall. There were handsome dressing
-cabinets, also of massive wood in fancy designs. Between the bedrooms
-was a large bathroom, where the bath was nothing less than a small
-swimming pool, the top being on a level with the floor.
-
-“Hurrah! a fellow can take a regular swim here!” cried Frank. “No
-wonder these folks look so clean. I’d want to bathe in that all the
-time.”
-
-Beyond the bedrooms was the kitchen, in which the most of the food for
-the table was prepared. Attached to the kitchen was a small room of
-rough stone, in which were located half a dozen tiny charcoal stoves
-for cooking.
-
-The servants attached to the place were as interesting as the house
-itself. A little negro boy went around with them. He had learned to
-say, “Yes, mistair,” and “No, mistair,” and he repeated these over and
-over again, each time bowing profoundly and rolling his eyes in a truly
-comical fashion. The boy’s name was Bulo, and our friends took to him
-from the start.
-
-“Pretty big house,” said Mark, as they stopped near the kitchen, where
-a dozen girls were at work, some preparing dinner and some shining
-tableware, all under the directions of a tall Spanish housekeeper.
-
-“Yes, mistair,” said Bulo, and bowed to the ground.
-
-“How many servants?” questioned Darry.
-
-“No, mistair,” replied the little colored youth, and bowed again.
-
-“I said, how many servants?” repeated Darry.
-
-“Yes, mistair, no mistair,” returned Bulo, and bowed half a dozen
-times, then as the boys laughed he laughed too, showing two rows of
-pure white ivories.
-
-“You’re all right, Bulo,” said Mark, after the merriment was over.
-“Here’s a souvenir for you,” and he handed the colored boy a medio,
-which, as mentioned before, is worth five cents.
-
-“Yes, mistair, yes, mistair,” said Bulo, with glistening eyes. And as
-he stuffed the coin in his shirt, he bowed half a dozen times again,
-and then, considering himself dismissed ran off, singing at the top of
-his voice.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIV
-
-A LOSS OF HONOR AND MONEY
-
-
-We will now go back to Dan Markel and Hockley, and see how the lank
-youth fared at the hands of the man from Baltimore.
-
-The proposition of Markel to “paint the town red,” appealed to Hockley,
-but he looked glum when he heard the words.
-
-“Yes, I’d like to go with you,” he said. “But I can’t.”
-
-“Can’t? And why not, my dear boy?”
-
-“I’ve got to stay around with the professor and the rest. We’re to
-visit a coffee plantation this afternoon.”
-
-“Oh, that’s dead slow.”
-
-“I know it is, and I don’t want to go, but I don’t see how I’m to get
-out of it.”
-
-Dan Markel lit a fresh cigar and handed the box to his visitor. “We
-must think of some scheme,” he said, slowly. “Ah, I have it. Write a
-note saying that you have met some old friends and won’t be back.”
-
-“But he’ll want to know about the friends to-morrow.”
-
-“Will he? Then state they are about to sail--anything to smooth it
-over. He can’t expect you to tie fast to his coat-tails all the time,
-you know. You’re too big for that.”
-
-“To be sure I’m too big,” blustered Hockley, lighting one of the cigars
-and making an attempt to enjoy it. “Let me have some paper and I’ll
-send the note.”
-
-Paper was produced and also a pencil, and soon the note was finished
-and given to one of the boys outside to deliver. Of course the message
-was a complete falsehood, yet it did not appear to trouble Hockley’s
-conscience.
-
-“Now what shall we do first?” asked the youth, after Markel had taken
-another drink from the bottle.
-
-“When are the others going to start for that plantation?”
-
-“They are starting about now,” answered Hockley, after consulting his
-watch.
-
-“What time have you?”
-
-“Half-past five.”
-
-“Ain’t you slow?”
-
-“I don’t think so. This watch is a first-class timepiece, and it ought
-to be, for it cost my dad a hundred and twenty-five dollars.”
-
-“Is that so?” Dan Markel’s eyes glistened. “Mine is a poor thing
-alongside of that. It only cost twenty-five dollars.” He arose and
-stretched himself. “Let us go and have something to eat first, and then
-I’ll show you some sights worth seeing.”
-
-They entered the dining room, and Markel ordered an elaborate repast
-with wine. It was a long time before it was served and then it was not
-nearly as good as what Hockley had had at the other hotel.
-
-“Guess they’ve been changing cooks here,” observed Markel, when he saw
-that the youth did not relish the food. “Had splendid feed when I was
-here before. The very freshest of everything. I’ll have to find another
-place by to-morrow.”
-
-“Come over to where we are,” suggested Hockley.
-
-“Thanks, perhaps I will.”
-
-It was dark by the time the repast was finished. Markel made a pretense
-of paying the bill but allowed his young friend to settle.
-
-“Say, but you are pretty well fixed,” he said, as he eyed Hockley’s
-roll of bills. “I wish I could say as much for myself.”
-
-“I’ve only got about a hundred dollars here,” answered the lank youth,
-carelessly. “But I can get the other when I want it.”
-
-“Did you have to put it in the professor’s care?”
-
-“No, he wanted it, but I told him I could take care of it. I left it in
-my valise.”
-
-“But somebody may go through your valise.”
-
-“I don’t think so. Besides, the money is under a false bottom in the
-valise. You can’t open it unless you touch a spring on the side.”
-
-“I see. That’s a handy thing. Well, let us be going, or it will be time
-to return before we’ve seen anything at all.”
-
-“I don’t care when I get back, Markel. I can tell the professor that my
-friends kept me all night.”
-
-“Of course you can. Say, would you like to see a real out-and-out cock
-fight? There is going to be one to-night, in the rear of the Horn of
-Gold saloon. The hotel keeper was telling me about it. He put up five
-bolivars on one of the birds. All the best sports in town will be
-there.”
-
-“All right, let’s go--unless there’s a bull fight on somewhere,”
-answered Hockley.
-
-“No bull fight to-night, Hockley. But that cock fight will be a cooler,
-I can assure you. One of the birds belongs to a Spanish millionaire,
-and the other to one of the native generals in the army. We will strike
-some high-toned people at the fight sure.”
-
-The prospect of going to a place where he would meet the “dead game”
-sports of Caracas pleased Hockley, and he already fancied how he would
-“blow” about the affair when he got back among his old cronies at home.
-“I’ll meet the bon-tons,” he said to himself. “It’s a good deal better
-than going to see a dried-up old coffee plantation.”
-
-They were soon on the way, down one broad street and then into a side
-road which was little better than an alleyway. At the end of the road
-stood a ramshackle building dimly lit. Over the door hung a gilded horn
-of plenty, giving to the resort its name, Horn of Gold.
-
-Entering the drinking room they found a crowd of thirty or forty
-assembled, of various nationalities, some black and some white, with
-two or three of Indian blood. At the rear a negro was strumming a
-guitar and another was singing at the top of his lungs, in order to
-make himself heard. But the clanking of glasses and the loud talking
-all but drowned out the music, if such it can be called.
-
-To a youth of good habits the surroundings would have been disgusting
-to the last degree. But Hockley took them in as “part of the game,”
-and said nothing. Yet the thick tobacco smoke made him dizzy, and he
-dropped his own cigar when Markel was not looking.
-
-Hockley was at a disadvantage, since he could not speak a word of the
-language. He listened attentively for some English, but none was spoken.
-
-“Sit down here while I learn the particulars of this fight,” said the
-man from Baltimore, and motioned him to a seat in a corner, near the
-guitar player. Then Markel went off, not to re-appear for ten minutes.
-
-“It’s all right--I’ve got two tickets, but I had to pay six bolivars
-for them,” said the man, on returning. “Come this way.”
-
-They passed through a dark passageway and into a small enclosure
-without a roof. There were several rows of benches around a boarded-up
-ring in the center. Half a dozen smoky lamps lit up this fighting pit,
-as it was termed.
-
-“One bird is called the King and the other Favorita,” said Markel. “The
-odds are on the King. I’m going to lay a few bolivars on him.”
-
-“Do the same for me,” said Hockley and passed over some silver coins.
-He was so dizzy from smoking and drinking that he could scarcely
-remember what the coins were worth.
-
-Markel made the bets, and soon the place began to fill with the sports
-who had come to see the fight. None of those who came in were the least
-bit “high-toned” in appearance, much to Hockley’s chagrin, nor did he
-behold a single military uniform, although he had expected to see a
-number.
-
-“Must be an off night,” said Markel. “Here, have another cigar. I see
-you have finished the other.”
-
-He insisted upon Hockley smoking, and by the time the cocks were
-brought in to fight the youth was so dizzy he could scarcely see. The
-place was filled with smoke, the crowd talked, laughed, cheered and
-hissed, and oaths were by no means lacking. In the midst of it all
-the birds fought until one was so badly wounded that it died shortly
-afterwards and the other was almost equally mutilated. And yet some
-people call such cruelty sport! It is not sport at all, simply an
-exhibition of brutality, the same as bull baiting and prize fighting.
-
-“What did you say? Is it over?” asked Hockley, trying to rouse himself
-from a sudden sickening stupor into which he had fallen.
-
-“Yes, it’s over and our bird wasn’t in it,” replied Markel. “What did
-you think of it?”
-
-“I couldn’t see much, on account of the poor lights and the tobacco
-smoke.”
-
-“Yes, the light was beastly. But it was a gamey fight, I can tell you
-that. Come on.”
-
-“I didn’t see many of the fashionables,” was Hockley’s comment.
-
-“No. I was told there is a ball on somewhere to-night and they must
-have gone there. Let us go into the saloon and have a drink.”
-
-There was a crowd in the dark passageway and Hockley found himself
-pushed first to one side and then another. Markel was beside him, and
-the hands of the man from Baltimore went into first one pocket of the
-youth’s clothes and then another.
-
-As soon as they had reached the drinking place Dan Markel insisted
-upon treating his companion liberally. Then he settled the score and
-went out to order a carriage to take them to the hotel.
-
-In such a condition that he could scarcely walk, poor, deluded Hockley
-was assisted to the turnout and Markel climbed in beside him. It was
-now after midnight.
-
-“Say!” cried Hockley, suddenly. “My watch is gone!”
-
-“Your watch?” ejaculated the man from Baltimore, in well assumed
-surprise. “Are you certain?”
-
-“Course I’m certain--it’s gone--best gold watch,” muttered Hockley,
-feeling into his various pockets with difficulty.
-
-“Perhaps you dropped it in the carriage,” went on Markel, pretending to
-make a search. “It don’t seem to be here.”
-
-“Some of those rascals at the cock fight robbed me,” groaned Hockley.
-He dove into his vest pockets. “Say! my money’s gone too!”
-
-“You don’t say!” cried Markel. “That is bad and no mistake. You must
-have run afoul of a regular thief. Is there anybody you suspect?”
-
-“Can’t say as there is. There was a nigger got pretty close to me just
-after the fight ended.”
-
-“Then he must be the man. Shall we go back?”
-
-“If he robbed me it ain’t likely he’s around now,” groaned Hockley. He
-gave a deep yawn. “Hang the luck anyway! Say, I feel awfully tired, I
-do.”
-
-His eyes closed and although he tried to keep awake in a few minutes he
-was fast asleep. Dan Markel eyed him curiously.
-
-“He was easier game than I thought of striking,” said the man from
-Baltimore to himself. “A gold watch and about a hundred dollars in
-cash. That’s not so bad. Wonder what I had best do with him?”
-
-The carriage rolled on, and as it covered the distance to the Hotel
-Ziroda, Dan Markel revolved the situation in his mind. As the turnout
-came to a stop a peculiar light flashed in the rascal’s dark eyes.
-
-“Might as well go the whole thing while I am at it,” he said to
-himself. “I won’t be able to hoodwink that professor as I have this
-young fellow. If I can get the rest of the money I can clear out, and
-they’ll never be able to find me.”
-
-He and the carriage driver assisted Hockley to the ground, and then
-one of the hotel helpers came forward and helped Markel get the youth
-to the room which the man from Baltimore occupied. No questions
-were asked, for such occurrences were not uncommon among those who
-patronized the Hotel Ziroda.
-
-“He will stay with me to-night,” said Markel. “I will foot the bill
-whatever it is.”
-
-Laying Hockley on the bed, Markel allowed him to sleep there, while he
-himself took a nap in a chair by the window. The youth lay in a stupor,
-snoring loudly, and was still snoring when Markel roused up at six
-o’clock.
-
-“My friend wishes you to send around to his hotel for his traveling
-bag,” said the man from Baltimore to the clerk in the office. “Here
-is his card. If Professor Strong is there, tell him that Mr. Hockley
-wishes to get a souvenir from the bag to give to his friend who is to
-sail to-day.”
-
-A messenger was sent off, and while he was gone Dan Markel walked
-around anxiously. He was half afraid Professor Strong would accompany
-the messenger on the return, in which case it would perhaps be best for
-him to leave by a back way and without notice to anybody.
-
-The messenger was gone fully half an hour, but when he returned he was
-alone, much to Markel’s relief. He had Hockley’s valise and turned it
-over to the man from Baltimore without question.
-
-When Markel re-entered the bed chamber the poor fellow was stirring
-uneasily. But he did not awaken and the rascal easily obtained from his
-pocket the key to the traveling bag. Then the bag was opened and Markel
-began a search for the hidden spring.
-
-At last it was found, and the false bottom flew up, revealing a pocket
-containing a flat pocketbook. Hastily opening the wallet Markel saw
-that it was filled with bank bills and gold to the amount of several
-hundred dollars.
-
-“I’ve got it!” he muttered, his eyes glistening. He closed the bag,
-locked it, and placed the wallet in his own clothing. For a moment he
-hesitated, then kicked the bag under the bed and hurried to the door.
-As he passed out Hockley gave a long-drawn sigh, turned over and went
-to sleep again.
-
-Once in the corridor, Dan Markel paused and looked around. Nobody was
-in sight, and watching his chance, he made his way to a side entrance
-of the hotel and from there into the street. Then he hurried on, down
-the square, and out of sight.
-
-[Illustration: “I’ve got it,” he muttered.]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XV
-
-SOMETHING ABOUT COFFEE GROWING
-
-
-“I feel like a new boy,” remarked Mark, on the morning following the
-arrival at Enrique Morano’s plantation. “I slept like a top last night.”
-
-“So did I,” answered Frank. “That bed just suited me. Wonder if anybody
-is stirring yet?”
-
-“They must be. I just heard Bulo singing. What a sweet voice that
-darkey has.”
-
-The boys were soon dressed and out in the courtyard, where the
-professor and the others presently joined them.
-
-“We will have a regular American breakfast,” said Enrique Morano.
-“Usually my countrymen have nothing but a cup of coffee and a roll on
-rising, but I dropped that habit when I stopped in the United States.”
-
-“I noticed the coffee and rolls at the hotel,” said Darry. “They are
-not very substantial.”
-
-Breakfast was soon served, of cantelopes, tapioca, fish, rice cakes,
-rolls, and coffee and to it all did full justice. The cantelopes were
-particularly fine and fairly melted in the boys’ mouths.
-
-“I must go to the University in an hour,” said Señor Morano. “But I
-have arranged for Greva, my head steward, to take you all over the
-place and explain whatever you desire to know. Greva speaks very good
-English. I will be with you again at four this afternoon, and then, if
-you wish, I will take you off on a horseback ride into the country.”
-
-“We were thinking of getting back to Caracas this afternoon,” said
-Professor Strong.
-
-“No, no, you must not think of it, my dear Strong!” cried the civil
-engineer. “I will not listen. You must remain to-night at least. I have
-so much I wish to talk about to you.”
-
-“Oh, let us stay!” whispered Darry. “I’m just aching for a good
-horseback ride.”
-
-“Yes, let us stay!” chimed in the others, and the professor could not
-resist the appeal.
-
-“But what of Hockley?” he said. “He will be wondering what became of
-us.”
-
-“Send him a letter to come out,” suggested Mark. And this was done, the
-letter being carried to the city by Enrique Morano himself.
-
-Immediately after Enrique Morano had departed, the steward, Juan
-Greva, who had been already introduced, came forward, and conducted
-them from the house to the nursery attached to the place.
-
-“This is where we first grow our coffee plants,” he said, in a strong
-Spanish accent. “We sow the seeds in the ground and let the plant come
-up until it is about a foot high before we transplant it to the field.”
-
-“And how long does it take for them to grow as high as that?” asked Sam.
-
-“About a year and a half. Then they are set out in the field, which is
-first ploughed thoroughly and planted with banana trees to shade the
-plants. Later on we plant bucuara trees instead of the bananas, as they
-are more hardy. If the coffee plants were not shaded like that they
-might dry up.”
-
-“Do they bear at once?” questioned Darry.
-
-“Oh, no, far from it. They sometimes bear a little the fourth or fifth
-year, but give nothing like a regular crop until the seventh or eighth
-year.”
-
-“Gracious, what a time to wait!” murmured Frank.
-
-“That is true, Newton,” said the professor. “But after a plantation is
-once started it will last fifty years or more.”
-
-“One plantation here has lasted seventy-five years,” said Juan Greva.
-“It yields 1,200 quintals of coffee a season, and the plantation is
-worth $60,000 of United States money.”
-
-“How much is a quintal?” came from Frank.
-
-“One hundred and twenty-five pounds,” answered the professor. “1,200
-quintals would be how much, Newton?”
-
-“150,000 pounds, sir,” answered Frank, after a short mental calculation.
-
-“Correct. Now, Robertson, at $15 per hundred pounds, what is such a
-crop worth?”
-
-“The crop is worth $22,500,” answered Mark, after another pause.
-
-“Gracious, there must be money in raising coffee!” exclaimed Sam.
-
-“Do they get fifteen cents a pound for this?” questioned Darry.
-
-“The market price at present is about sixteen cents,” answered Juan
-Greva. “It runs from ten cents to twenty-two cents.”
-
-“You must remember, boys, that what is received for the coffee is not
-pure gain. The plants have to be cared for constantly and there is much
-to do before the bean is ready for the market. All such labor has to
-be paid for.”
-
-From the nursery they walked to the coffee grove itself, a long and
-broad field, laid out into squares, with ditches of water flowing
-between. The plants were set out in rows, with many banana and bucuara
-trees between.
-
-“The coffee plants blossom in September,” said the steward, as they
-walked through the field. “The blossoms are something like orange
-blossoms, which your ladies love to use at weddings. Then comes the
-berry, which is something like a red cherry and is picked in April and
-May. The picking is a great time and men, women and children take part,
-each with a basket on his or her back. A good picker can pick berries
-enough in one day to make forty to fifty pounds of coffee.”
-
-Going into one of the storehouses, the steward brought out some of the
-half-dried berries and broke them open. Inside rested the seed, two
-coffee beans with the flat sides together and covered with a sticky
-pulp.
-
-“Don’t look much like the beans we get,” said Frank.
-
-“These beans have to be dried and the pulp must be taken off,” said the
-professor.
-
-“How do they get the pulp off?” asked Mark.
-
-“The berry is first crushed and then the mass is put through a machine
-which separates the pulp from the seeds. Then the seeds, or beans, are
-washed twice and dried, and come out as white as anyone would wish.”
-
-“But our coffee isn’t white,” said Frank. “It’s green--that is, before
-it is roasted.”
-
-“The whiteness is all on the skin of the bean, which must be taken off
-before the coffee is ready for market. Did you notice that large stone
-flooring on the other side of this field? That is the drying floor.”
-The professor turned to the steward. “How long do you dry your coffee
-here?”
-
-“From six weeks to two months,” answered Juan Greva. “The weather makes
-the time short or long. Each day the coffee is spread out with rakes
-and at night it is gathered in heaps and covered with heavy cloth.”
-
-“What a lot of work for a cup of coffee!” murmured Mark.
-
-“The work does not stop there,” said the steward with a smile. “When
-the coffee is dry it goes into a machine which takes off the shell and
-then into another machine which blows it perfectly clean. After that it
-goes to the sorting room, where the girls separate the good beans from
-the bad and grade the good into five grades.”
-
-“And then what?” came from Sam.
-
-“Then the coffee is placed in bags and sewed up--that is, the coffee
-which goes to the United States and England. When you get it, it is
-roasted and ground.”
-
-“And then we take it and boil it, and strain it, and put milk and sugar
-to it, and drink it down, and that’s the end of it,” broke in Darry.
-“What a lot to do just for one cup of coffee! I never dreamed of such
-work before.”
-
-“There is something else that is done with coffee, though not here,”
-said Professor Strong. “In Brazil they often paint coffee black for the
-South African market, and in other places coffee is polished so that it
-shines like silver. Every country has its peculiar taste and the dealer
-must do his best to suit that taste or lose the trade.”
-
-After walking through the coffee grove, they turned back to the
-warehouses, and Juan Greva explained the various tools at hand for
-caring for the plants. “The coffee bush is a hardy one, but must be
-carefully watched if we wish to get the best results,” he said. “It
-must have enough water but not too much, and we must be careful of
-grubs and worms.”
-
-It was now growing warm, and the whole party was glad enough to retire
-to the shelter of a palm grove behind the warehouses. On two sides of
-the grove were long rows of fruit trees with bushes of various kinds of
-berries growing between. They sat down and a servant presently appeared
-with a pitcher of iced lemonade and a platter of little cakes covered
-with honey.
-
-“This looks like a land of plenty,” said Mark, leaning back on a bench
-and taking a deep breath. “How fresh and green everything is! It seems
-to me a man ought to be able to make a living without half trying.”
-
-“The trouble down here has been the constant revolutions,” answered the
-professor. “Nothing has been safe, and nobody felt like settling down
-to steady work. But that will pass away in time, and then South America
-will take a leap forward that will astonish those living in the North.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVI
-
-DARRY’S WILD RIDE
-
-
-Promptly at four o’clock Enrique Morano returned from the University.
-He found our friends taking it easy in the patio, in hammocks which
-Juan Greva had had strung there, under the giant palm.
-
-“That is right, take it comfortably,” he said, with a smile. “I am glad
-to see it. It is so hard to get the Yankees to rest a little. They want
-constantly to be on the go--to do something--to keep their brain at
-work. Here, in this warm climate, it would kill a man to keep at such a
-pace.”
-
-“It does make one lazy,” returned Darry, as he sat up. “But you won’t
-find me lazy when I get in the saddle.”
-
-“Then you love to ride?”
-
-“He’s crazy for a horse,” put in Mark. “You see, his father is a big
-cattle dealer from Chicago, and Darry has been out on the ranches more
-than once. I believe you once helped to break a bronco, didn’t you,
-Darry?”
-
-“Yes.”
-
-“Then I will have to provide you with an animal of spirit,” said
-Enrique Morano, with another smile. “Very well, you shall have such a
-one.”
-
-“No, no, don’t give him a fiery, untamed steed, Morano,” interrupted
-Professor Strong. “Remember I am responsible for his well-being while
-we are in Venezuela.”
-
-“But I don’t want an old--plug,” said Darry, with a crestfallen look.
-“If the horse is broken I’d like to ride him even if he has some ginger
-in him. Father lets me ride what I please at home.”
-
-“Well, I’ll take a look at the horse first,” answered Professor Strong,
-slowly. “As to ‘plugs,’ as you term them, I don’t think our host keeps
-any such.”
-
-“Oh, I didn’t mean to insinuate that he did,” said Darry, hastily.
-
-They walked down to the long, low stable and the head hostler brought
-forth a number of the horses. Enrique Morano pointed out a big bay.
-
-“That is the fellow,” he said. “I can ride him, but he may prove too
-much for you.”
-
-“Let me try him,” pleaded Darry.
-
-The bay was saddled, and the youth leaped up, whip in hand. The horse
-pranced about a bit but soon set off at an easy gait. The step is
-called the _trote de paseo_, and is natural to the steeds in all upper
-South America.
-
-“Why he’s easy,” sang out the boy, after riding up and down the horse
-yard and out to the highway and back. “I am sure I won’t have a bit of
-trouble with him.”
-
-“He rides with confidence and well,” observed Enrique Morano. “He ought
-to have no trouble on the road.”
-
-The matter was talked over, and finally Darry was allowed to ride the
-bay horse, which rejoiced in the name of _El Montero_--The Huntsman.
-The others were quickly provided with steeds, and a little later they
-left the plantation, Enrique Morano leading the way on a favorite black.
-
-For a long distance the road was level and they moved off in a close
-bunch. Every one of the party had learned to ride years before, so
-there was no delay on that score. Mark and Frank wanted to race, but
-the professor would not hear of it.
-
-Presently they crossed a heavy stone bridge, bearing this inscription:
-
- THE ILLUSTRIOUS AMERICAN,
- GENERAL ANTONIO GUZMAN BLANCO,
- PRESIDENT OF THE REPUBLIC,
- HAD THIS BRIDGE ERECTED FOR
- THE PUBLIC GOOD.
-
-“What a funny inscription,” observed Sam, as he stopped to read it
-aloud.
-
-“General Antonio Guzman Blanco doesn’t want himself forgotten,” laughed
-Mark. “I have seen a dozen monuments with his name on them, and at
-least two dozen of his portraits.”
-
-“He was a great man in his day,” said Enrique Morano, gravely. “A very
-great man. He made many improvements, such as building schools and
-libraries, making highways and waterworks, and bringing order out of
-disorder. But it would have been better had he not advertised himself
-quite so extensively.”
-
-“That’s just it,” said Frank, and added, under his breath to Darry:
-“You’d think he was trying to advertise some special brand of Stomach
-Bitters, wouldn’t you?” And Darry had to bite his lip to keep from
-laughing outright.
-
-“There isn’t half left of President Guzman Blanco’s monuments that
-there once was,” said Professor Strong. “After his downfall, and after
-the people became convinced that he was negotiating with foreign powers
-against their good, they took revenge by pulling down many of his
-statues, destroying his portraits and renaming many of the streets and
-parks christened in his honor. His fine plantation was ruined, and even
-the State that bore his name was re-named Miranda.”
-
-Across the bridge the road ascended a slight hill and then passed
-through an avenue of tropical trees beautiful beyond description. Birds
-were numerous and their music added to the delight of the riders.
-
-“It’s like a bit of paradise!” said Sam, as he drew rein, with Mark
-beside him. “Just look at that scenery. Did you ever behold anything so
-beautiful? See yonder waterfall, how it glistens in the sunshine and
-how gracefully the vines fall over the rocks beside it! What a spot for
-a painter!”
-
-The others had also halted, all but Darry, who was secretly itching to
-“let the bay out,” as he told himself. Now he saw his chance and away
-he went, before either Professor Strong or Enrique Morano noticed him.
-There was a turn a hundred yards ahead, and this gained, Darry whipped
-up the bay and away they went up the hill and down the opposite side
-at a break-neck speed, the boy urging the horse on at every step.
-
-“This is what I call riding! Whoop!” he called out. “Get up there,
-Huntsman, get up, I say!”
-
-Soon he was out of sight and hearing of the others and still tearing
-along at a gait which was truly astonishing. But the bay acted well and
-he had small difficulty in keeping his seat. Indeed, he thought the
-riding even easier than some he had experienced while in our own west.
-
-The downward slope of the hill left behind, Darry found himself
-confronted by a fork of the road. There was small time to decide and
-he took the branch to the south, as that looked more traveled than the
-other. But he had hardly gone a hundred yards before he noticed that
-the highway was somewhat cut up, as if some improvements were underway.
-
-A short distance further on he came across a gang of native workmen,
-armed with picks, spades and shovels. They were digging a trench beside
-the road and some of them shouted to him as he rode past, but he did
-not understand a word they said.
-
-“Can’t stop me to-day, thank you!” he shouted back pleasantly, and
-urged on his steed as before.
-
-The road now made another turn, among a mass of rocks and brushwood.
-Here it crossed a narrow rocky stream, where the water ran swiftly. The
-bridge was out of repair and the workmen were engaged in putting up a
-permanent stone structure to take its place.
-
-“Go back! Go back!” shouted a foreman of the laborers, in Spanish.
-“Go back!” And he rushed forward to stop Darry’s horse. But before he
-could do so, the youth was past him and riding on the old bridge, which
-sagged and trembled beneath the sudden weight.
-
-“Gracious, this won’t do,” thought the boy, and tried to get the horse
-over the bridge with all possible speed.
-
-He had just reached the end when there came a loud explosion, as
-terrifying as it was unexpected. The workmen were engaged in blasting
-rocks which stood in the way of the new bridge and had just set off a
-charge of dynamite. They had tried to warn him to go back, but he had
-not understood them.
-
-As the explosion came horse and rider were lifted into the air for
-several feet and before they landed again, each was struck by the
-shattered stone, which flew in all directions. The bay came down on his
-knees, throwing Darry over his head into the stream beneath the bridge.
-Then with a wild plunge the frightened steed went on, leaving the boy
-to his fate.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVII
-
-A TALK ABOUT BEASTS AND SNAKES
-
-
-“Darry has gone on ahead,” observed Mark, looking down the road.
-
-“He’s off for a ride now!” cried Sam. “My, see him go!”
-
-“He is foolish to ride so fast in this sun,” said the professor, half
-angrily. “Darry, come back!”
-
-But the call did not reach the flying youth, and he was soon out of
-sight. Scarcely had he disappeared when Enrique Morano gave a start.
-
-“We must stop him,” he ejaculated. “We must stop him before it is too
-late.”
-
-“Too late?” came from the others in alarm.
-
-“Yes, too late. Below here are two roads and he may take the wrong one
-and go to the old bridge, which is worn out and not safe.”
-
-“Come!” The word came from the professor and without ado he urged his
-horse forward at twice the speed they had formerly employed. Enrique
-Morano rode beside him and the boys brought up closely in the rear.
-
-About half the distance to the old bridge was covered when the noise of
-the explosion reached their ears. Professor Strong gazed inquiringly at
-his old college friend.
-
-“What can that mean, Morano?”
-
-“They are working on the new bridge and are blasting rocks there. I
-trust the workmen warned the youth--if he took that road.”
-
-It was not long before they came upon the first of the workmen and the
-civil engineer questioned them.
-
-“Yes, he came this way,” said Enrique Morano, to the professor. “One
-man says he must have been right on the old bridge when the blast
-occurred.”
-
-“Pray heaven he is safe!” murmured Professor Strong, his face paling
-slightly.
-
-When they reached the old bridge they found the workmen running down to
-the water’s edge.
-
-“He is here!” cried the foreman, to Morano. “His horse ran away and
-threw him. The blast was too much for the beast.”
-
-“Where is the boy?” demanded the professor, and having the direction
-pointed out to him, leaped to the rocks and ran forward to the edge of
-the stream.
-
-Darry lay on his back, partly in and partly out of the water. His eyes
-were closed and he was motionless.
-
-“Poor boy, he looks as if he were dead!”
-
-“No, no, don’t say that Darry is dead!” cried Frank, who had come up by
-this time. “Perhaps he’s only unconscious.”
-
-No one replied to this, but all rushed boldly into the stream. Soon
-they had raised the body up and carried it to a patch of grass under a
-tree. The professor got down on his knees to make an examination.
-
-“He is alive!” he murmured, after a painful pause. “I believe he has
-only been stunned.”
-
-As he finished speaking Darry gave a shudder and opened his eyes.
-
-“Whoa!” he murmured. “Whoa!” and then closed his eyes and gave a shiver.
-
-“You are safe now, my boy,” said the professor. “Take it easy. You are
-safe.”
-
-At last Darry opened his eyes again and gave a gasp.
-
-“Wha--what does this mean?” he questioned, slowly, and then put his
-hand to his side and gave a groan.
-
-“Don’t you remember the explosion?” asked Mark. “The horse must have
-thrown you.”
-
-“Yes, yes, I remember now. Is the--the horse all right?”
-
-“Never mind the horse,” put in Enrique Morano. “I sincerely trust you
-are not seriously injured.”
-
-“I’ve got a pain in my side, but I guess it won’t amount to much,”
-answered Darry and attempted to sit up. But the effort was too much and
-he sank back again.
-
-“Rest as you are,” said the professor, kindly. “We will get a carriage
-to take you back to the plantation.”
-
-“To be sure. I will go for the carriage myself,” said Enrique Morano,
-and leaping into the saddle again he dashed down the highway with the
-best speed his steed could attain.
-
-While Enrique Morano was gone Professor Strong made an examination of
-Darry. As a hunter and traveler he had had considerable experience in
-caring for the wounded and he soon learned that no bones were broken.
-The youth was simply bruised and in a few days would be as well as
-ever.
-
-One of the workmen on the road had gone after the runaway horse and now
-returned, leading the bay, which was covered with foam and dust. The
-steed trembled with excitement and pranced around continuously.
-
-It was half an hour before Enrique Morano appeared, driving the largest
-carriage of which his plantation boasted. Into this Darry was lifted
-carefully and Professor Strong rode beside him, to save him as much as
-possible from being jounced around.
-
-“I have sent a servant for a doctor,” said the civil engineer. “He will
-probably be at the house as soon as ourselves,” and such proved to be a
-fact.
-
-By nightfall Darry found himself lying on a cool and comfortable bed.
-A bruise on his head was bound up in a white bandage and there was
-another bandage over his hip. As the boy was naturally strong and
-healthy the physician said that medicine for him would be unnecessary.
-
-“I’m glad he didn’t make me take a big dose of something nasty,” said
-Darry to Frank. “Some doctors do that, you know, just to let you think
-they are earning their fee,” and Frank had to smile at this, it was so
-much like his chum’s way of looking at things.
-
-Under the circumstances it was impossible for the party to leave the
-plantation, and after some talk Professor Strong decided to accept
-Enrique Morano’s invitation to remain there until the following Monday.
-
-“That will give Hockley a chance to see the coffee plantation and learn
-how coffee is raised,” said the professor. “I will go and bring him
-while you boys remain with Crane.”
-
-“It’s queer Hockley hasn’t come along on his own account,” said Mark.
-“His friends must be off by this time.”
-
-“I know of no steamer sailing to-day,” put in Enrique Morano, who stood
-near. “His friends must be going on some sailing vessel.”
-
-“Have you a list of the sailings?” asked Professor Strong, quickly.
-
-“Yes, in the newspaper of yesterday. Here it is.”
-
-The professor took the paper and read the list with care. As Morano had
-said there was no sailing of any steamer. The sailing vessels to leave
-were two in number, one bound for Cape Town, South Africa and the other
-bound for Rio Janeiro, Brazil.
-
-“I thought his friends were bound for Philadelphia,” mused Professor
-Strong, and said no more. But his eyes took on a speculative look as
-though he feared Hockley had not told the exact truth in the note which
-had been sent.
-
-Dinner that evening was quite an elaborate affair and lasted fully an
-hour. When it was over, Enrique Morano insisted upon going into town
-with the professor.
-
-“I am certain you boys can amuse yourselves while we are gone,” he
-said, to Mark and the others. “Make yourselves at home. There are books
-and a piano, and in the corner are several portfolios of pictures to
-look over.”
-
-“All right, I guess we’ll put in the time pleasantly enough,” was
-Mark’s answer, and soon the two men were gone and the boys found
-themselves alone, excepting for the servants that remained within call
-to wait on them.
-
-The portfolios of pictures proved of great interest to all but Darry,
-who soon fell into a sound sleep, from which the others did not awaken
-him. In the collection of pictures were views of the great Cathedral
-at Caracas, the numerous Public Buildings, the Botanical Gardens, the
-wonderful railroad bridges around the mountains and over the valleys,
-the harbors at La Guayra, the waterways leading to the mighty Orinoco,
-and views of the great river itself, showing the canyons to be found in
-certain localities and the fierce rapids. The latter views interested
-them most of all.
-
-“I’m just aching to get on that river,” said Frank. “What fun we will
-have, hunting, fishing and camping out! The cities are all well enough,
-but one gets tired of them after awhile.”
-
-“We haven’t seen so very much of the cities yet,” put in Sam.
-
-“We’ve done up Caracas, and that’s the main city. And we stopped at La
-Guayra, which is as important a seacoast town as they have.”
-
-“I’m with Frank on the river question,” said Mark. “I hope I get a shot
-at some big game.”
-
-“The professor thinks there is no large game left in Venezuela,” said
-Sam. “He said there were a number of animals of the cat variety like
-the puma, ounce and ocelot.”
-
-“I’ve heard there were jaguars here--in the big forests.”
-
-“The professor said there might be some but they were becoming very
-rare. You see, the people who have immense herds of cattle on the
-_llanos_, or prairies, have to protect their stock and so they have
-hunted the wild beasts pretty thoroughly.”
-
-“I know other things they have, which we may fall in with, and they are
-just as bad as big game and maybe worse,” said Mark.
-
-“What are they?” asked Frank, with increased interest.
-
-“Alligators, rattlesnakes and boa-constrictors.”
-
-“Ugh!” came from Sam, with a shiver. “Deliver me from a
-boa-constrictor. I saw one once in a menagerie. They fed it on live
-rabbits and the sight was enough to make one sick.”
-
-“The professor says the rattlesnakes are more to be feared
-than anything,” went on Mark. “He says the alligators and the
-boa-constrictors generally keep their distance, but the snakes strike
-you through the tall grass before you can realize what is up. I can
-tell you what, we’ll have to keep our eyes open when we get down on the
-hunting ground.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVIII
-
-A BITTER DISCOVERY
-
-
-Hockley sat up on the bed and stared around him in stupid bewilderment.
-For the moment he could realize nothing but that he had a bursting
-headache and felt wretched all over.
-
-“It was the drinking and smoking that did it,” he thought and gave a
-low groan. “Oh, my head!”
-
-For several minutes he sat almost motionless, trying to collect his
-senses. Then he gazed around the room and at last realized that he was
-in the apartment which Dan Markel had engaged.
-
-“Markel!” he called out. “Markel, where are you?”
-
-Receiving no answer, he dragged himself to his feet. He was all in a
-tremble and soon sank down in a chair by the barred window. He saw that
-the sun was up and that the street was alive with people.
-
-“It must be pretty late,” he muttered, and felt for his watch to note
-the time. “Oh, I forgot. The watch was stolen, and so was my roll of
-bills. This is a pretty how-do-you-do, anyway. What will the professor
-say when he hears of it? But I don’t care--he ain’t my master, and I’m
-going to do as I please.” He put his hand to his forehead. “Oh, how
-everything spins!”
-
-There was a wash basin and some water handy and the lad bathed himself,
-after which he felt slightly better. As he was re-arranging his collar
-and tie he began to wonder what had become of his friend.
-
-“Perhaps he has gone to hunt up my watch and money,” he thought.
-“Hope he gets them. Dad will be awful mad over that watch, I know. He
-cautioned me to be careful of it when he gave it to me.”
-
-Hockley waited for quarter of an hour longer and then, out of patience,
-rang for an attendant.
-
-“Where is Mr. Markel?” he asked. “See if you can find him.”
-
-“_Si, señor_,” said the servant, who understood a little English and
-was kept to wait on Americans.
-
-After the man was gone Hockley sat down by the window again and gave
-himself up to his reflections. They were far from pleasant.
-
-“That cock fight was a fizzle,” he muttered. “Markel must take me for
-a fool to cart me off to such a place. I’ve a good mind to tell him so,
-too, when he comes. If he can’t take me to better places than that I’ll
-cut him.”
-
-Hockley’s head continued to ache, and the quarter of an hour he had to
-wait ere the servant returned seemed an age to him.
-
-“Mr. Markel cannot be found, _señor_,” was the report. “I have searched
-all over the place, but it is of no use.”
-
-“He isn’t in the dining room?”
-
-“No _señor_.”
-
-“Did you see him go out?”
-
-“I did not, _señor_.”
-
-“He didn’t leave any word at the office?”
-
-“He did not, _señor_.”
-
-“It’s mighty queer what has become of him. I’ll go out and look for him
-myself.”
-
-Leaving the apartment Hockley strolled into the office and took a look
-up and down the hot street and then into the wine-room. Of course he
-saw nothing of the man from Baltimore, who was now miles away. Much
-bewildered but still unsuspicious he went back to the office.
-
-“He must have gone away shortly after you sent for your bag,” said the
-hotel keeper, who also spoke English.
-
-“After I sent for my bag?” repeated Hockley. “I sent for no bag.”
-
-“No?” The hotel keeper looked astonished. “He said you wished it, and
-we sent a boy after it. He took it to your room.”
-
-“I haven’t seen the bag,” answered Hockley, and then his heart sank
-suddenly within him, for he remembered telling Markel of the secret
-compartment. What if the man from Baltimore had played him false?
-
-“The bag must be in your room,” went on the hotel man stoutly. “I saw
-it carried in myself.”
-
-“I’ll go and look,” returned the lank youth and almost ran back to
-the apartment. At first he failed to locate the valise but presently
-discovered it under the bed and hauled it forth.
-
-“Robbed! Every cent gone!” The cry came straight from Hockley’s heart,
-and trembling from head to foot he sank into a chair, the picture of
-misery and despair.
-
-“You are robbed?” asked the hotel keeper, who had followed him to the
-door.
-
-“Yes, robbed! That man has taken all of my money.”
-
-“But he was your friend!” ejaculated the other, in bewilderment.
-
-“He pretended to be my friend,” answered the youth, bitterly. “I met
-him on the steamer from New York. He was a stranger up to that time.”
-
-“And an American! It is very sad, _señor_. What will you do? Put the
-police on his track?”
-
-“I don’t know what to do. I’m strapped--I haven’t a dollar to my name.”
-
-At this the brow of the hotel keeper darkened.
-
-“Who then will pay your bill?” he asked sharply.
-
-“My bill?”
-
-“Yes, _señor_. I am a poor man, for the hotel business is not very good
-this year. I cannot afford to lose what is coming to me.”
-
-“You’ll have to lose it!” cried Hockley, angrily. “I’ve been duped,
-don’t you understand? Cleaned out. How can I pay you?”
-
-“But you are with another party, at the big hotel. They told me up
-there of it.”
-
-“That’s true, but I’m not going to pay Markel’s bill, I can tell you
-that,” snorted Hockley.
-
-“If you do not pay I shall tell the police it is a scheme to cheat me
-out of my money,” was the sullen answer. “You have some baggage, that
-bag, I shall hold it until I am paid. You shall not remove it.”
-
-[Illustration: “You have some baggage in that bag. I shall hold it.”]
-
-At this Hockley was horrified, feeling that he was getting deeper and
-deeper into difficulty.
-
-“Haven’t you any pity on a fellow who has been cleaned out?” he pleaded.
-
-“I am a poor man--I must have my money,” returned the hotel keeper,
-stoutly.
-
-“All right, you shall have it,” answered Hockley. “But you’ll have to
-wait until I get back to the other hotel and get the cash.”
-
-“I will go with you,” answered the hotel keeper, who was unwilling to
-trust the youth out of his sight.
-
-Valise in hand Hockley tramped back to the hotel at which our friends
-were stopping. He fully expected to find Professor Strong and the
-others awaiting him, and wondered what explanation he should make
-concerning his plight.
-
-When he learned that all were at the plantation still he did not know
-whether to be glad or sorry. He hunted out the hotel clerk and asked
-concerning the professor and the others.
-
-“I would like to borrow a little money until they get back,” he said.
-“Professor Strong will make it good when he settles up.”
-
-The money was at once forthcoming, and Hockley settled up with the
-keeper of the Hotel Ziroda. He would not pay for Markel, and the hotel
-man said he would keep whatever had been left behind until the bill was
-settled. But the man from Baltimore had left little of value outside of
-a newspaper containing some dirty linen.
-
-It was a very crestfallen youth who slipped into the dining room for
-breakfast and one who was in a humor to eat but little. As he gulped
-down a cup of coffee Hockley meditated on the situation. He wanted to
-smooth matters over with Professor Strong but did not see his way clear
-to doing it.
-
-“I suppose I’ll have to face the music in the end,” he thought, with a
-long sigh. “Oh, what a downright fool I was, to be taken in so easily!
-If the other fellows hear of it how they will laugh at me!”
-
-When Professor Strong arrived in the evening he saw at once that
-something out of the ordinary had occurred. Hockley sat in his room,
-his head tied up in a towel.
-
-“What is the matter, Hockley?” he asked.
-
-“I’ve had bad luck, sir,” whined the youth. “Awfully bad luck.”
-
-“Why, how is that?”
-
-“I fell in with that Dan Markel, sir--after I had left those friends
-I mentioned in the note. Markel is a villain. He induced me to go off
-with him last night, and then he drugged and robbed me.”
-
-“Is it possible! I did not like the looks of the man when first we met
-on the steamer. But I thought we left him behind at Curaçao.”
-
-“He came on after us. He was a sly one, I can tell you, sir. You know
-I said I wanted to see the lumber yards, so that I could write to my
-father and tell him how business was carried on here. Well, he said he
-knew all about them and would show me around. So I went with him after
-my friends sailed and instead of showing me around he took me to some
-kind of a hotel. I had some cocoa and it was drugged and after that I
-didn’t know a thing until I woke up at the Hotel Ziroda and found my
-watch and money gone. And what was worse the villain had sent for my
-valise and robbed that too.”
-
-This mixture of truth and falsehood was told very adroitly, and
-Professor Strong could not but believe the tale. He hurried to the
-other hotel and interviewed the proprietor, and then notified the
-police of what had occurred. An alarm was sent out and a hunt made for
-Dan Markel, but the man from Baltimore could not be found.
-
-Professor Strong wished to know something about the friends Hockley had
-met, but the youth pretended to be too sick to talk. He had been clever
-enough to look over the sailings in the newspaper and said they had
-gone on the _Desdemona_ to Rio Janeiro, and were going from that port
-to Philadelphia.
-
-As the youth seemed too sick to journey to the plantation Professor
-Strong remained with him all night, and Enrique Morano went back alone
-to carry the news to the others.
-
-“Humph! we are having all sorts of excitement,” was Mark’s comment.
-“First it was myself, then it was Darry, and now it’s Hockley. I wonder
-what will happen next?”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIX
-
-BATHING AT MACUTO
-
-
-During the time that Darry was ill, the others took the railroad to
-Valencia and stopped half a day in that ancient town, which is one
-of the most picturesque in all of South America. They visited Lake
-Valencia, lying far above sea level, and Enrique Morano took them to a
-cathedral in the vicinity where can be seen a number of rare religious
-paintings. On the way back a stop was made at Victoria, once the place
-where Bolivar lived and where a great number of relics of the departed
-great man are stored.
-
-Darry’s sickness did not last, and inside of five days he announced
-that he would be able to go anywhere. “But I shan’t try to run away
-again on a horse,” he added, with a rueful smile.
-
-The boys had endeavored to question Hockley about his experience with
-Dan Markel, but could get no satisfaction. Once Hockley flew in a rage
-at Sam over this.
-
-“It’s my business, not yours,” he growled. “I lost the money and the
-watch. You only want to crow over me, but let me tell you, if you go
-too far somebody will get a thrashing.”
-
-“I don’t want to crow at all, Hockley,” returned Sam. “I thought that
-perhaps I might be able to help you--if this Markel ever shows himself
-again.”
-
-“He won’t show himself--he’s too cute,” grumbled the other. “Now you
-just keep quiet about it.” And there the subject was dropped, so far as
-it reached the injured one.
-
-“He’s sore, no doubt of that,” said Frank to Sam, when told of the
-conversation. “And I don’t blame him. Just the same, I’ll wager he went
-off with Markel to have a good time.”
-
-“I think that too, Frank. Well, if he went too far, he’s had to pay for
-it,” returned Sam.
-
-All told, the stay at the coffee plantation had been full of interest
-and the boys thanked Enrique Morano over and over again for his
-kindness to them.
-
-“If you ever come to New York we’ll do all we can for you,” said Mark,
-heartily, and the others spoke in a similar strain.
-
-The next day found them back to Caracas and here they stopped but a
-few hours before taking a train for La Guayra. Arriving at the seaport
-arrangements were made for a side trip, so to speak, to the Gulf and
-the Lake of Maracaibo, situated to the westward. But the vessel was not
-to sail until two days later, so while waiting they took a little run
-over to Macuto, located not far from La Guayra.
-
-“Macuto is the Bar Harbor, Asbury Park, and Coney Island of Venezuela,”
-explained the professor, while the party was on the way, along a
-highway skirting the ocean. “It is only six miles from the seaport, and
-is a great resort for the folks in Caracas and La Guayra who wish to
-escape the extreme heat of those towns. It gets a constant breeze from
-the north and as a consequence is usually ten to fifteen degrees more
-on the side of comfort.”
-
-On arriving at Macuto the boys were somewhat disappointed to find the
-greater part of the beach highway given over to drinking places and
-general stores, while the hotels were further up on the hills behind
-the sand.
-
-“Can’t we go in bathing?” asked Sam. It was a sport he enjoyed
-exceedingly.
-
-“Yes, there is a bathing spot, at the end of the highway,” answered the
-professor, and thither they made their way. The bathing pavilion was
-built in the shape of a castle, standing in the water at the end of a
-long wharf.
-
-The boys were soon inside, and each paid his medio for a bathroom and
-the use of a towel. They soon discovered that the men bathed in one
-place and the women in another, and that but few suits were used. But
-suits were to be had at an office in a corner of the building and they
-procured these and all went in, including the professor, who was an
-excellent swimmer.
-
-“Tell you what, this is something like!” cried Sam, enthusiastically,
-as he splashed about and then scooped some water up over Frank’s head.
-“Come on, I’ll race you!”
-
-“Done!” answered Frank, who was also a good swimmer, and in another
-moment the two lads were off, while a crowd, composed largely of
-natives, watched them.
-
-There was not much danger, as the bathing spot is enclosed by rows of
-piling, over which the surf booms constantly. The water was warm and
-clean. The race was to the stone wall which divides the men’s space
-from that of the women’s and both reached the goal at the same time.
-
-“A tie!” shouted Mark. “Better call it off,” and they did and went in
-for diving and plunging and “horse play” to their heart’s content. Even
-Hockley seemed to thaw out over the fun and joined in as readily as
-anybody.
-
-After the bath the entire party paid a visit to several of the leading
-hotels, stopping at one for a shell-fish dinner which was as delicious
-as any they had ever eaten. At the hotel was a native orchestra playing
-operatic airs and popular songs. Seeing the Americans the leader
-started his men to playing what was then the popular song in New York.
-This pleased Mark and Frank, and when a collection was taken they did
-not forget to contribute.
-
-“By Jove!” cried Hockley, as they were on the point of leaving the
-hotel. “It’s him!”
-
-“Him? Who?” asked Mark, who stood beside the lank youth.
-
-“Dan Markel. He just went into that store over yonder!”
-
-“Then you had better tell the professor and have him arrested.”
-
-“I will.”
-
-Professor Strong was just settling their bill when Hockley acquainted
-him with what he had seen.
-
-“To be sure, we must catch him,” he cried. “Lead the way.”
-
-Hockley set off on a run, with the professor beside him, and the others
-bringing up the rear. Markel had entered a _bodega_, or grocery, which
-were numerous in that particular vicinity.
-
-Markel was buying something in the shop when, on glancing up, he saw
-Hockley rush in, followed by Professor Strong and the others. They
-all made directly for the fellow, who found himself surrounded almost
-before he realized it.
-
-“Give me my watch and that money,” ejaculated Hockley, in quick rage,
-and caught the man from Baltimore by the sleeve.
-
-“Hullo, what’s the matter?” demanded the man, trying to put on a bold
-front.
-
-“I’ll show you what’s the matter,” blustered Hockley. “Give me the
-watch and money I say.”
-
-“You must be crazy. I haven’t anything belonging to you.”
-
-“And I say you have.”
-
-“Hockley says that you robbed him while he was in your company last
-week,” put in Professor Strong. “I think you had better come with us to
-the police station.”
-
-“The boy doesn’t tell the truth. He drank too much and got in a crowd,
-and when he came out his money and watch were gone. I had nothing to do
-with it.”
-
-“I say it’s not so,” ejaculated Hockley, growing red at being exposed.
-“You sent for my valise and robbed that, too. I can prove you sent for
-it by the proprietor of the Hotel Ziroda.”
-
-At this shot Dan Markel grew pale. He felt that he was cornered and
-that a visit to the police station would do much to prove his guilt.
-He had left the watch behind him, but he had Hockley’s money--or the
-larger portion of it--on his person, and he did not know but that some
-of the bills could be identified.
-
-“It--it’s all a mistake,” he faltered.
-
-“You come to the police station with us,” said Professor Strong,
-quietly but sternly.
-
-Dan Markel looked around. There seemed no way of escape and his face
-fell.
-
-“All right, I’ll go with you,” he said, although he had no such
-intention. “But let me tell you that you are making a big mistake, and
-that you’ll have a suit for damages on your hands.”
-
-“I’ll risk the suit,” returned the professor, grimly.
-
-All marched out of the _bodega_, much to the astonishment of the
-proprietor, who had not understood a word of what was said. On the
-corner they paused.
-
-“There ought to be a policeman somewhere----” began Professor Strong,
-when without warning, Dan Markel tore himself loose and leaped into the
-street. Several carriages were passing and in a twinkling he had darted
-between these and was running for an alleyway not far distant.
-
-“He’s running away!” burst out Hockley. “Come on after him!” And he
-started to follow, and so did the others. But the street was so crowded
-that it took several seconds to gain the other side, and by that time
-Markel was out of sight.
-
-“I saw where he went,” said Mark. “Into the alley way. Come on,
-Hockley.”
-
-“I’m with you,” was the answer, and both boys hurried on as fast as the
-condition of the thoroughfare would permit.
-
-Dan Markel was thoroughly alarmed, for he felt that if he was captured
-Professor Strong would see to it that he was given a long term of
-imprisonment.
-
-“They shan’t get me this trip,” he muttered to himself, and seeing
-a doorway open close at hand, darted through this, into a large
-warehouse. From the entrance he made his way among a number of boxes
-and barrels to the rear. Beyond was another alleyway and he leaped
-into this. With all the speed left to him he managed in a few minutes
-to gain the boulevard where the carriages ran between Macuto and La
-Guayra. A vehicle containing only a couple of passengers was passing
-and he leaped into this.
-
-“I wish to get to La Guayra as soon as possible,” he said to the
-driver. “An extra bolivar for you if you whip up your horses.”
-
-“_Si, señor_,” was the answer, and the driver cracked his whip. Away
-went the turnout; and that was the last seen of Dan Markel for some
-time to come.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XX
-
-A SHORT VOYAGE WESTWARD
-
-
-Two days later found our friends on board a steamer bound for the Gulf
-of Maracaibo. The weather was all that could be desired, and for the
-most part all were in excellent spirits, the single exception being
-Hockley, who still mourned the loss of his money and timepiece.
-
-“It’s a shame we didn’t catch Dan Markel in Macuto,” said the lank
-youth more than once. “I think we might have done it if the professor
-hadn’t been so slow to act.”
-
-“We did all we could,” had been Mark’s answer. “But that Markel is a
-mighty slick one, and we’ll have to get up bright and early to corner
-him.”
-
-Although the others did not know it, Professor Strong had given Hockley
-a severe lecture on the return to La Guayra, telling the youth of the
-folly of associating with a man of Markel’s character, and of the
-further foolishness of drinking and trying to be a so-called sport.
-
-“You will ruin both your health and your character by such actions,”
-the professor had said. “A young man who will act in that fashion shows
-a lack of common sense. I want no more of it.” And though Hockley had
-felt strongly inclined to “talk back” he had not had the courage to do
-so.
-
-The steamer sailing from La Guayra to the Gulf of Maracaibo made a stop
-at Curaçao, so that little could be seen of the coast line between La
-Guayra and Cape St. Roman, at the entrance to the gulf. The stop at
-Willemstad was of short duration and nobody of the party went ashore.
-Then the course was straight around the cape into the gulf, which is
-nothing less than an inlet of the Caribbean Sea, seventy-five miles
-deep and about twice as broad.
-
-The Gulf and the Lake of Maracaibo are connected by an irregular strait
-twenty miles long and five to ten miles wide. The lake itself is a
-hundred miles long and three quarters that in width. It is very deep,
-so that large vessels can sail on it almost from end to end. But big
-vessels cannot get in or out because the strait is shallow and filled
-with shifting bars of sand.
-
-“What a picturesque spot,” was Sam’s comment, as the steamer made her
-landing at Maracaibo, which is situated upon the strait. “And it looks
-as if they did a big business here.”
-
-“Yes, a very large business is done here,” answered Professor Strong.
-“They export millions of pounds of coffee and cocoa each year, besides
-hides, cotton, and other articles of commerce.”
-
-They were soon ashore and took a trip on the street railways, which
-stretch a dozen miles or more in various directions. On every side was
-the greatest of activity, the wharves being as full of life as those at
-New York city. There were electric lights and telephones the same as at
-Caracas.
-
-“They are up-to-date, that’s sure,” said Mark. “Anybody who comes down
-here expecting to find a howling wilderness will have his eyes opened.”
-
-“The country would progress even more rapidly were it not for many
-things beyond human control,” returned the professor. “But the heat is
-at times terrific and the fever lays many low, and then they have had
-some awful earthquakes and tidal waves here.”
-
-After the ride the party visited various public buildings and public
-parks, with their statues of Bolivar, Guzman Blanco and other
-celebrities.
-
-“We are now in the State of Zulia,” said Professor Strong, “and not
-over ninety miles from the eastern boundary of Colombia. This State
-contains about 100,000 inhabitants, of which 30,000 live in this city.
-A good deal of the trade you see here comes over the mountains from
-Colombia on mule back. Several railroads are contemplated, and when
-they are built Maracaibo will be one of the most important points for
-shipping in the northern part of South America.”
-
-The party stopped for two days at Maracaibo, visiting several towns in
-the vicinity, which, however, were of small importance. On the second
-day Frank proposed that they hire one of the native boats for a short
-sail on the lake.
-
-“Just so we can tell the folks at home that we sailed on Lake
-Maracaibo,” he said.
-
-“Hurrah, just the thing!” cried Sam. “I’d like that first rate.”
-
-The others were equally enthusiastic, and soon a boat was procured,
-something similar to a sloop, but with the sail running directly to the
-masthead. A native was in charge who could speak a little English, and
-he agreed to take them down the lake for a distance of a dozen miles
-and bring them back early in the evening.
-
-With a basket filled with good things procured at their hotel, the
-party embarked at one of the long, low piers, and soon the mainsail was
-set and they were speeding away over the clear waters of the lake at a
-rate of seven knots an hour. The craft was a staunch built affair and
-minded her helm to perfection.
-
-“I see you know how to handle her,” said Mark, to the boatman, who
-rejoiced in the name of Salvador.
-
-“_Si, señor,_” was the answer. “I been a boatman since a little baby so
-big,” and Salvador smiled broadly.
-
-“What do you do with the boat, fish?”
-
-“Fish when weather good, _señor_. When weather no good carry cocoa and
-t’ings, or go to sleep.”
-
-“Go to sleep is good,” laughed Frank. “That’s one thing everybody down
-here seems able to do.”
-
-Mark and Frank had purchased some fishing tackle in the town and as
-they sailed they threw out lines behind for trolling. Salvador showed
-them how to bait up to the best advantage and soon Mark found he had a
-bite. He hauled in without delay and brought on deck a bass weighing
-all of a pound and a half.
-
-“First haul!” he shouted, highly pleased.
-
-“Here is another,” cried Frank, and brought in an equally big fish. All
-examined the catches with care but saw little difference from the fish
-caught nearer home.
-
-“Any electric eels here?” asked the professor of the boatman.
-
-“I have heard of a few but I never see them, _señor_.”
-
-“Electric eels?” repeated Hockley. “Do they come from Venezuela?”
-
-“Yes, we’ll find them in the Orinoco, Hockley,--big ones too. We will
-have to be careful when we go fishing there, unless we want to get a
-shock.”
-
-“Pooh! I’m not afraid of an eel,” returned the other. “I saw an
-electric eel once, in an aquarium at Chicago, but he didn’t have much
-electricity in him.”
-
-“Then he must have been almost exhausted. A strong healthy electric eel
-can give a man as much of a shock as anybody wants, I can assure you.”
-
-Inside of two hours the boys had a string of ten good sized fish, and
-then the professor told them they had better stop the sport as it
-delayed the progress of the boat. So the lines were hauled in, after
-which they progressed faster than ever. A stiff breeze was blowing and
-the sky was cloudless.
-
-“We couldn’t have a nicer day for this trip,” said Darry, and all
-agreed with him.
-
-Salvador knew of a beautiful grove on the shore of the lake, and to
-this he directed their course. There was a little stretch of sand,
-backed up by a grove of stately palms, and behind this some rocks and a
-waterfall.
-
-“Oh, if only I had my camera,” sighed Sam. He had brought along a
-photographic outfit but unfortunately had left it at the hotel. The
-rocks and the waterfall looked very inviting, and they took their
-dinner in sight of the place but under the palms, for the sun was hot
-in spite of the breeze.
-
-After the meal some of the boys stretched out for a rest. Sam wished to
-go swimming but at this the native boatman shook his head.
-
-“No go here,” said Salvador. “Go in water, maybe git bit by crab. Bad
-crab here.”
-
-“Crabs?” said Sam. “I haven’t seen any.”
-
-“Me show you,” returned the boatman and led the way along the sand.
-Procuring a sharp stick, he walked along until he came to a round hole
-close to the water’s edge. He thrust the stick into the hole. Instantly
-came a scattering of sand and an ugly looking brown crab came into
-view, hissing viciously and with his eyes bulging from their sockets.
-Sam sprang back to get out of harm’s way but the crab leaped into the
-lake and sank from sight.
-
-“What an ugly beast!”
-
-“Him more ugly if you stick toe in his hole,” grinned Salvador. “Maybe
-him bite toe off.”
-
-“I believe you,” and Sam gave a shudder. “A nice beach for swimming
-truly!”
-
-“The land crabs of South America are all more or less dangerous,” said
-Professor Strong, who had watched proceedings from a distance. “Some of
-them are poisonous and all will give you a nasty bite if they get the
-chance. You must never bathe unless you feel certain there is nothing
-around to harm you.”
-
-It was not until half an hour later that they prepared to leave the
-spot. Some clouds had come up and Salvador said he was afraid they
-might be in for a blow before nightfall.
-
-“I wouldn’t mind a little wind, just for the excitement,” said Frank.
-
-“Yes, but we don’t want too much,” returned the professor. “They are
-as liable to have squalls on Lake Maracaibo as they are on any of our
-great lakes at home.”
-
-“Do you think we’ll get a squall?” cried Hockley, in something of alarm.
-
-“I trust not, Hockley. If it blows too heavily we’ll have to run in
-shore somewhere until it is over.”
-
-They were soon aboard the boat, the mainsail was hoisted, and away they
-ran, in the direction of the town. The wind was so fresh that the spray
-flew in all directions so that it was impossible to find a dry spot.
-Hockley grumbled at this, but there seemed no help for it.
-
-“As it is warm it won’t hurt you,” said Professor Strong. “As soon as
-we reach the hotel I will see to it that all have dry clothing.”
-
-An hour later found them out of sight of land and bowling along as
-swiftly as ever. The sky was now growing darker, the sun having gone
-behind a heavy bank of clouds. Presently the wind died out completely,
-leaving the sail flapping idly.
-
-“We’re getting a calm instead of a storm,” said Frank. “And just as we
-were making such good time, too!”
-
-“It’s the calm before the storm, Newton,” answered Professor Strong.
-“We’ll get more wind than we want in half an hour.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXI
-
-THE SQUALL ON LAKE MARACAIBO
-
-
-What Professor Strong said proved to be true. In less than half an hour
-they saw the whitecaps forming on the lake behind them. The wind came
-and went in fitful gusts, and then of a sudden came a blow that was
-little short of a hurricane.
-
-“We’re going to catch it now!” shouted Mark. “Just hear how it
-whistles!”
-
-“Hold fast, all of you!” came from Professor Strong.
-
-“We are holding fast,” answered Darry, who was clinging to the stern
-sheets with might and main.
-
-The sail had long since been taken in and Salvador stood at his rudder,
-doing his best to keep the craft up to the wind. But this was no easy
-task for the wind was veering around rapidly.
-
-“Gracious, it’s down on us for keeps!” shouted Frank, a moment later.
-“Look at that!”
-
-He bobbed his head forward and looking the other boys made out a low
-wall of white foam moving on them with incredible swiftness. There was
-a strange humming in the air and the sky became blacker than ever.
-
-In a twinkling the squall was on them in all its fury, sending the
-sloop headlong into the foam. The boys could see nothing and held their
-breath in awful suspense. Hockley fairly shivered with terror, but none
-of the others noted this, being too busy caring for their own safety.
-
-As the sloop veered around, the boiling foam mounted to the forward
-deck and Sam was caught as in the breakers of the ocean. He was
-clinging to a low guard, unaware that the thing was partly rotted away.
-Without warning came a cracking and before he realized it he was over
-the side.
-
-Down and down, and still down went poor Sam, until he felt that he must
-be going straight to the bottom of the lake. He was so bewildered that
-for several seconds he scarcely knew what to do. He turned over and
-over and clutched out wildly, reaching nothing but the water, which, at
-this distance below the surface, was as calm as ever.
-
-At last the youth struck out for the surface. He wanted to breathe but
-knew that if he opened his mouth and took in the water it might prove
-fatal to him. His head began to grow dizzy and a strange pain shot
-across his chest. Then he came up, opened his eyes and gave a gasp.
-
-“I went overboard,” was his thought. “Where can the sloop be?”
-
-He tried to call out, but his puny effort was drowned completely by
-the wind, which whistled as fiercely as ever. On every side of him the
-water boiled and foamed as before and he was thrown around like a cork,
-often turning over and going beneath the surface.
-
-The next few minutes were to the boy little short of an age. He
-strained his eyes for some sign of the sloop but could see absolutely
-nothing of the vessel. He was alone on the broad bosom of Lake
-Maracaibo!
-
-Alone! It was an awful thought and as it flashed over his mind he felt
-his heart sink like a lump of lead in his bosom. Alone! Would they come
-back for him, or would he be left there to drown?
-
-“They ought to come back,” he muttered. “They _must_ come back! Oh, God
-spare me!” And the prayer was repeated over and over again. It gave
-him strength, and he struck out as best he could, determined to keep
-afloat as long as possible.
-
-All told the squall did not last over twenty minutes, but to poor Sam
-it seemed an age. He made scant progress through the milklike foam, but
-this did not matter, since he knew not in what direction he was heading.
-
-“I may be going away from the sloop and away from land too,” he thought
-dismally. “But I’ve got to do something,” and he continued to swim.
-
-His strength was nearly gone when he bumped into something hard. Laying
-hold of the object he found it was a spar, which, from its general
-appearance, had been in the water for many months. He clasped the spar
-tightly and this sustained him without further aid.
-
-The gusts of wind had been followed by a heavy downpour of rain and
-this continued for all of half an hour. It was still dark and Sam could
-not make out in what direction he was drifting. At last, however, he
-saw a dim outline of land ahead and did his best to shove the spar in
-that direction. His feet touched bottom, and more dead than alive he
-dragged himself out of the lake and flung himself headlong in some
-rank grass under a clump of wild plantains.
-
-When Sam sat up he found the storm going down and the setting sun
-trying to break through the clouds. The rain had ceased and the bosom
-of the lake, while still covered with whitecaps, was gradually resuming
-its normal condition.
-
-“What an experience!” he murmured, as he looked out upon the water.
-“Wonder if the sloop weathered it or went to the bottom? Oh, if only
-all the rest are safe!”
-
-He arose to his feet but found himself so weak that he was glad enough
-to rest again. He was on a bit of an island for behind him was a wide
-ditch which separated the patch from the mainland. In the distance
-was a hill backed up by a lofty mountain. Not a human being nor a
-habitation of any sort was in sight.
-
-“I’m alone and no mistake,” he mused. “I wonder how I had best strike
-out? Let me see, by the way the sun lies I must be on the eastern shore
-of the lake and if that’s so I’m opposite to the strait where the
-town is situated. I’m sure I can’t see how I’m going to get back to
-Maracaibo.”
-
-Before Sam could make up his mind how to move darkness was upon
-him--the darkness of the tropics, which descends without warning. At
-this he sprang up in added alarm.
-
-“I can’t remain here all night,” he thought. “At least I don’t want to.
-The place may be full of snakes and those uncanny land crabs. I must
-get up on higher ground if nothing else.”
-
-He set out for the hill he had noticed, but before he had gone a
-hundred yards, found himself in the mire surrounding the ditch.
-
-“This won’t do,” he muttered and started to go back, but only ended by
-getting in deeper until he was up to his knees. He was now thoroughly
-alarmed and came to a standstill almost in despair.
-
-Had it been light Sam might have seen that not far away was a firm
-stretch of ground leading up to the hill. But he could not see this and
-so deemed it best to get back to where he had first landed.
-
-Retracing his steps was not easy and once he fell, covering his arms
-and breast with mud. When he did get back to the wild plantains he was
-a sight to behold and it took him some time to regain his wind.
-
-“I’m a prisoner on this bit of marshland--that’s all there is to it,”
-he mused, as he flung himself down near the edge of the lake. “I
-suppose I’ve got to make the best of it until morning. But how am I
-going to pass the night?”
-
-At the risk of stirring up some of the dreaded crabs, he waded into
-the lake and washed himself of the mud. Then he wrung out his jacket
-and hung it up to dry. Fortunately it was a hot night, so there was no
-danger of catching cold.
-
-The squall had driven away a good many of the mosquitoes, which infest
-Lake Maracaibo almost as numerously as they do Staten Island, but now
-the little pests began to return and presently Sam found himself kept
-busy by them and also by a species of gnats which are equally annoying.
-To save himself from their bites he tied his wet handkerchief over his
-head and neck.
-
-In planning for the trip Mark had mentioned how handy it would be for
-each to take along a waterproof match-safe and Sam had provided himself
-with one of these. Satisfied that he would have to remain where he was
-for some hours at the least, he hunted around for some dry grass and
-plantain leaves and proceeded to build himself a smudge fire. This
-burnt slowly because of the dampness and the thick smoke soon put the
-most of the gnats and mosquitoes to flight.
-
-The fire, dim as it was, gave an air of cheerfulness to the spot, and
-Sam felt much better as he watched it glow up and then droop. He did
-not let it go out, but kept piling on the grass, which he tore up in
-clods with ease. This grass is of the wire variety, very strong, and
-is much used by the natives in making baskets and various household
-articles.
-
-[Illustration: “I heard something, what was it?”]
-
-It must have been close to midnight when Sam fell into a doze, being
-so worn out he could scarcely hold up his head. He had piled the fire
-as high as possible and his only danger was that the smoke might veer
-around and choke him to death.
-
-How long he dozed he could not tell exactly, afterward, nor could he
-tell what awoke him. But he opened his eyes with a start and was on his
-feet almost before he was aware.
-
-“I heard something,” he told himself. “What was it?”
-
-He listened but only a faint breeze blowing through the grass and wild
-plantains reached his ears. He strained his eyes, yet only the total
-darkness met his gaze.
-
-Much alarmed Sam continued to stand on guard. He had cut himself the
-stalk of a young plantain with his jack-knife and he held this in
-his hands, at the same time keeping as close to the fire as possible,
-knowing that all wild beasts dread anything burning.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXII
-
-PORT OF THE HAIR
-
-
-“Where is Sam?”
-
-Such was the question which came from Mark, after the worst of the blow
-was over.
-
-“Samuel?” queried Professor Strong, quickly. “Isn’t he at the bow?”
-
-“No, sir.”
-
-“He must have gone overboard!” ejaculated Darry. “Sam! Sam! where are
-you?”
-
-“He did go overboard,” panted Hockley, who had just been clearing his
-mouth of lake water. “I saw him go.”
-
-“Then why didn’t you give the alarm?” demanded the professor
-indignantly. “How long ago was this?”
-
-“Only half a minute, sir. I would have spoken before, but that last
-wave almost drowned me.”
-
-“Sam! Sam!” called the others in concert, and listened attentively
-for an answer. When none came they looked at each other in increasing
-alarm.
-
-“Did you see the boy go overboard?” asked the professor of the native
-boatman.
-
-Salvador shook his head. “See noddings,” he said. “I do best to keep
-boat from turning up, _señor_.”
-
-“We must turn back for him,” went on Professor Strong.
-
-“Turn back, _señor_? Dat is dangerous,” and the native shook his head.
-
-“Perhaps, but we must go back, nevertheless. Here, I will help you
-bring her around. Boys, watch for him, two to the right and two to the
-left. We must find and save him.”
-
-“Yes! yes!” said Frank. “Poor Sam! What would his mother say if he was
-drowned!”
-
-The sloop came around with difficulty and for the moment threatened to
-swamp herself. As the water rolled up, Hockley gave a groan of terror.
-
-“Don’t, please don’t!” he whined. “We’ll all go to the bottom next.
-Head her for land!”
-
-“Cling fast and you will be safe,” answered Professor Strong, who was
-as cool as ever, although deeply concerned over Sam’s welfare.
-
-“But we’ll go down--I know we will,” pleaded the lank youth.
-
-“We are bound to save Sam, so shut up,” cried Mark, getting angry.
-“Sam may be nothing to you but he is a good deal to us,” and thereupon
-Hockley became silent, although he shivered with fear every time the
-sloop made an extra heavy lurch.
-
-In the midst of the wind and rain it was hard to follow the back course
-correctly and without knowing it they passed far to the westward of
-where Sam had gone overboard.
-
-“I can’t see a thing,” remarked Mark, after a painful silence lasting
-nearly quarter of an hour.
-
-“Nor I,” returned Frank.
-
-“It’s raining too hard to see much,” came from Darry.
-
-“It is gradually letting up,” said the professor. “And he must be
-somewhere in this neighborhood.”
-
-They continued to cruise around until the sun went down, much to
-Hockley’s disgust.
-
-“It’s no use,” said the lank youth. “He’s gone to the bottom and that’s
-all there is to it.”
-
-“You ought to be ashamed of yourself to speak so, Jake Hockley!”
-retorted Mark. “Haven’t you any heart?”
-
-“Of course I have, Mark Robertson, but I know a thing or two. If he
-was afloat we’d have found him long ago.”
-
-“We will continue the search if it takes all night,” came from the
-professor. “I cannot believe that poor Winthrop is drowned.”
-
-“Poor Beans” murmured Darry, and the tears started to his eyes. “Such a
-good chap as he was!” And he felt almost like hurling Hockley overboard
-because of his heartlessness.
-
-Upon questioning Salvador, the professor learned that there was a long
-stretch of marshland not a great way off and that it was possible that
-Sam had found his way in that direction.
-
-“It is a mile, _señor_. He would have to be a very good swimmer to
-reach it,” said the boatman.
-
-“We’ll sail over to it anyway,” answered Professor Strong. “We must do
-something.”
-
-The course of the sloop was changed and they moved slowly for the
-marshland, beating against the wind. Darry was at the bow watching
-eagerly for any sign of life which might appear.
-
-“I see something in the water, dead ahead,” he sang out presently and
-all rushed forward to investigate. At first they felt sure it must be
-Sam’s body but as they drew closer found it was nothing but a mass of
-seaweed with some rubbish on top.
-
-“Too bad!” came from Hockley. “I thought the search was ended.”
-
-“I’m glad we didn’t find him drowned,” answered Frank.
-
-They were interrupted by a cry from the professor. “I see a light
-ahead, low down as if on the water’s edge. It looks like a signal.”
-
-“It must be a signal,” said the native boatman. “No house dare--no
-people live dare. All wet ground and mud, _señor_.”
-
-As they drew closer to the fire the professor let out a long and loud
-cry:
-
-“Winthrop! Sam Winthrop! Is that you?”
-
-No answer came back and once again the boys felt a keen disappointment.
-But the course of the sloop was not changed and soon they were so close
-to the fire that they could see around it quite plainly.
-
-“Somebody is there,” ejaculated Mark.
-
-“Yes, and it’s either Sam or his ghost,” added Frank. “Hullo, Beans!”
-he yelled, at the top of his lungs.
-
-The figure at the fire, which had been watching landward, with club
-upraised, turned suddenly and peered into the darkness of the lake.
-
-“Who calls?”
-
-“Beans, true enough!” came from Mark.
-
-“Are you safe, Winthrop?” asked the professor, and then the sloop came
-up, ramming her bow deeply in the mud of the bank. In another moment
-the crowd was surrounding Sam and the boys were hugging him warmly.
-
-“Yes, I’m safe,” answered Sam, when he felt able to speak. “I--I went
-to sleep and woke up thinking some wild animal was going to attack me.
-I’ve had a pretty hard time of it, I can tell you.”
-
-“We’ve all had a hard time,” grumbled Hockley. “We’ve been looking for
-you for hours.”
-
-“When I went overboard I thought I’d be drowned sure,” went on Sam, and
-then he related his story from beginning to end. “I can tell you, I
-want no more Lake Maracaibo squalls.”
-
-“Nor do we,” came from Mark. “It was worse than the one I once
-experienced on Lake George,--when our yacht, the Firefly, was dashed on
-the rocks and ruined.”
-
-“Let us all be truly thankful for Winthrop’s escape,” put in the
-professor. “It was the act of an all-wise and all-powerful Providence
-that has spared him.”
-
-The little party remained around the fire for quite a while, talking of
-the storm and drying their clothing. Then the blaze was kicked into the
-water and they boarded the sloop once more.
-
-“Are you quite sure we won’t have any more squalls?” asked Sam, of the
-native boatman.
-
-“Storm gone now--no come back to-night,” answered Salvador.
-
-Once aboard of the sloop the course was straight for Maracaibo. But the
-wind had gone down and it was not until after sunrise that they ran
-into the harbor and landed.
-
-“Well, I guess you won’t forget Lake Maracaibo in a hurry,” said Mark
-to Sam, as they walked to their hotel.
-
-“You’re right I won’t,” was the reply. “One such adventure is enough in
-a lifetime.”
-
-They were just in time for breakfast and never did a meal taste better
-for, as Darry expressed it, “they were all as hungry as Tomcats locked
-out for the summer.” An hour was spent at the hotel and then they
-hurried away to catch the steamer back to La Guayra.
-
-“I’m going to take a nap when I get on board,” said Mark, and this
-he did, and the others followed his example. They slept for several
-hours and did not stir until the steamer ran into the harbor of Puerto
-Cabello, situated directly north of Valencia, and thirty miles by
-railroad from that city.
-
-“Puerto Cabello means the Port of the Hair,” explained Professor
-Strong. “The harbor is so safe that it was said in olden times that
-a ship could be anchored here by a single hair. This used to be a
-terrible spot for yellow fever, and Sir Francis Drake died here of the
-scourge, after capturing and looting Caracas and other cities in Queen
-Elizabeth’s time.”
-
-Puerto Cabello is one of the most important seaports of Venezuela.
-Vessels from many countries stop there, bringing in goods of all sorts
-and taking away cargoes of coffee and cocoa in exchange. The long
-warehouses of importers and exporters line the docks and not far away
-is the railroad running to Valencia and other points of more or less
-importance. The public buildings are numerous and the usual statues
-of Bolivar and other public characters are not lacking. From Puerto
-Cabello to Valencia there is a well-built wagon road and this is used
-constantly by traders who are too old-fashioned to use the railroad.
-
-“You cannot hire some of the natives to get on a train,” said the
-professor, while they were looking around the town. “They look upon the
-railroad as the invention of the Evil One. They are the ones who have
-retarded the progress of South America for centuries.”
-
-At Puerto Cabello the boys witnessed some trading which was as
-interesting as it was amusing. An old native had brought in some
-pineapples which he wished to exchange in trade for some clothing.
-Instead of lumping the value of his stock in trade, he valued each
-pineapple separately and wanted to know what it would bring in
-exchange. Thus he gave two pineapples for a hat, three for a pair
-of slippers, one for a flaming red neckerchief, one for a big brass
-pin holding a polished bit of glass, and ten for a pair of trousers.
-The latter bargain was made with difficulty, the clothier taking the
-trousers and laying them on his counter and the native placing one
-pineapple after another alongside until the clothier nodded his head
-to show that he was satisfied. Then the native, having two pineapples
-left, traded them for a small bottle of cologne.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIII
-
-A STOP AT TRINIDAD
-
-
-“Off for the Orinoco at last! Now for some real fun and excitement
-Mark, aren’t you glad that we have left Caracas and La Guayra behind?”
-
-“I am Frank, and I hope the trip up the Orinoco proves all we
-anticipate,” answered Mark, as he threw himself into a steamer chair
-beside his chum. “But as for excitement, I don’t think we have any
-reason to complain. We’ve kept a-going pretty well since we arrived.”
-
-“So we have,” put in Darry, who was close at hand, watching the last
-speck of land fade from sight. “But we haven’t had any fun, in the
-shape of hunting, and I suppose that’s what Frank means.”
-
-“To be sure--and fishing, too, and camping out. It’s all well enough to
-see the cities and towns, but I want to see more--the great river and
-the wonderful mountains and waterfalls, and all that.”
-
-“I want to see the wild horses,” came from Sam. “They tell me they have
-any quantity of them down on the _llanos_, and that you can buy a
-horse for a dollar or two any time you want him.”
-
-“A wild horse wouldn’t be of much account until he was broken,” said
-Mark. “And in trying to break him you might break your own neck. You
-can be sure they are not so easy to tame as our own domestic horses.”
-
-“I want a shot at a puma or something like that,” continued Darry. He
-had had it all planned out for a long time--how he was going to send
-the skin home for a rug to place in the parlor.
-
-They were on a British steamer bound for Port-of-Spain, on Trinidad
-Island, which lies off the north-east coast of Venezuela. From
-Port-of-Spain they expected to catch another steamer bound directly
-up the Orinoco to Ciudad Bolivar, the head of navigation for large
-steamers, especially during the dry season.
-
-“It’s a great coast,” said Mark, as he gazed back, where the mountains
-were now lost in the distance. “There ought to be splendid chances for
-mining there.”
-
-“There are splendid chances,” said the professor, who overheard the
-remark. “The mountains are full of minerals. But at present most of the
-mining is done in the interior. We will visit some of the camps along
-the upper Orinoco.”
-
-The run to Port-of-Spain was a hot one, despite the breezes which blew,
-and the boys were glad enough when, one morning, the steamer turned
-into the Gulf of Paria, a great land-locked harbor in which a vessel
-can anchor anywhere with ease.
-
-“To the westward is the eastern shore of Venezuela,” said the
-professor, “and on the east is the island of Trinidad, which, as you
-all know, is a very valuable British possession. Trinidad is known all
-over the United States for it gives to us something which is used on
-the finest of our streets. Do any of you know what that is?”
-
-“Asphalt,” replied Frank. “I have heard that there is a regular lake of
-it on the island.”
-
-“There is, ninety-nine acres in extent, and the asphaltum flows over
-its banks in all directions, making natural walks which are almost as
-hard as stone. At the center of the lake the pitch is boiling hot and
-bubbles up with an odor which is far from pleasant.”
-
-“I wouldn’t mind seeing the place,” said Hockley.
-
-“We may get a chance to view it from a distance. To get too close would
-not be pleasant. The job of getting the asphaltum out is one of the
-meanest on earth. The stuff is chopped off the surface in spots where
-it is cold, and no matter how deep a hollow is made, nature soon fills
-it again. How the Pitch Lake, as it is termed, originated, has bothered
-scientists since its discovery.”
-
-“Do you notice the difference in the appearance of the water,” remarked
-Sam. “It was blue before, now it is a dirty brown. Has that anything to
-do with that Pitch Lake?”
-
-“No, Winthrop, the dirt you see is washed into the Gulf from the
-Orinoco, which has a number of mouths in this vicinity, as well as
-mouths emptying directly into the Atlantic.”
-
-Before nightfall they came in sight of the port and dropped anchor in
-the roadstead, for the harbor of Port-of-Spain is too shallow to admit
-the passage of large vessels. Soon a small craft came alongside and
-took them ashore.
-
-“We are in an English country sure enough,” declared Mark. “See how
-many English there are. It does one good to hear the language spoken
-again.”
-
-“I’m afraid you’ll be disappointed in the town,” said Professor Strong.
-“It looks so beautiful from a distance. It is very dirty, and many of
-the houses are little better than huts. Of course the English that are
-here live well enough. It is the native element that is away behind the
-times.”
-
-Nevertheless, the party managed to find a comfortable hotel, kept
-by a whole-souled son of Great Britain, who rejoiced in the name of
-Wellington Cunningham.
-
-“Glad to know you,” said Wellington Cunningham. “Make yourselves at
-’ome. So you are bound for the upper Orinoco, eh? Take my hadvice and
-stay away from the bloody country. Hi know hall habout it, Hi do. Went
-there in ’87 and halmost died of the bloody fever. Hit ain’t fit for a
-white man. If the fever gets you you’re a corpse.”
-
-“That’s cheerful,” was Mark’s comment. “But we are not going to stay
-very long.”
-
-“Better not go. Hif you want to see the world visit Hold Hingland. No
-better country on the globe.”
-
-“No better?” queried Frank, with a wink at his chums. “What of the
-United States?”
-
-“Too green, lad, too green. ’Twill be hall right henough when you ’ave
-the age,” responded Wellington Cunningham, solemnly.
-
-“It suits us--we wouldn’t want anything better,” said Mark, dryly.
-
-The hotel was crowded with people, and among the number was a Colorado
-gold miner named Andrew Hume, who was bound for the upper Orinoco on a
-prospecting expedition. The miner was both good-hearted and talkative
-and was soon on first-class terms with our friends.
-
-“That Englishman makes me snicker,” said Andy Hume, as he wished
-himself to be called. “He talks about the States, and what he don’t
-know would fill the Colorady river basin. Asked me if the Injuns
-interfered with the mining, and if the miners and other folks out west
-wasn’t afraid the bears and buffaloes would eat ’em up! When I told him
-I hadn’t seen a bear nor a buffalo for years, and told him the only
-Injuns in our camp was three good-fer-nuthin scamps who laid around the
-saloons all day soaking firewater, he looked at me as if I was crazy.
-He must think Colorady and Californy are howling wildernesses.”
-
-“No doubt he does think that,” said Mark. “But then, you must remember,
-we have some queer notions of South America and South Africa. I didn’t
-dream that everything in Venezuela--I mean in the cities--was so
-up-to-date,--telephones, electric lights, street cars, and all that.”
-
-“Well, I’m with you there, lad, I didn’t dream of ’em myself. And I
-heard of something yesterday that kind of stumped me, too. They have
-mines and mining machinery away up back in the country just as good as
-any in Colorady or Californy. Some syndicates running ’em and making
-millions out of ’em, too, I reckon.”
-
-It was found that Hume intended to take a steamer for Ciudad Bolivar
-on the following Monday, and the professor succeeded, after some
-difficulty, in procuring passage for his party on the same vessel. This
-pleased the old miner, and he said he trusted they would have a good
-trip and become firm friends.
-
-Although the town of Port-of-Spain is far from beautiful, the country
-back of the city is all that one’s heart could desire. There are fine
-highways running in all directions, lined with the most beautiful of
-tropical trees and shrubbery. Flowers grow in Trinidad in endless
-profusion and birds and butterflies are equally numerous, not to
-mention the monkeys and parrots.
-
-“It’s a Paradise in spots,” observed Darry. “But only in spots. I don’t
-think I would care to live here.”
-
-On Sunday they visited the cathedral of the city, and here heard
-not only an excellent sermon but likewise some fine music. In the
-afternoon they visited the botanical gardens, the pride of all
-Englishmen residing in Trinidad. The collection of flowers, ferns and
-trees were certainly remarkable and one not easily forgotten.
-
-The boys were up bright and early Monday morning, and by nine o’clock
-were on the steamer, bag and baggage. At Port-of-Spain the professor
-had visited a number of establishments and procured such additions to
-their outfit as he deemed necessary.
-
-“We will have to go well equipped,” he said. “For I know but little
-of the towns in the interior. At the time I visited here before they
-amounted to but little, so far as being able to buy what one wished was
-concerned. They kept plenty of goods for the native trade, but those
-things wouldn’t suit you.”
-
-“No, I’d rather stick to what I’m used to,” said Sam. “It’s enough to
-go into a strange country among a strange people, without putting up
-with things to wear and use with which you are unacquainted.”
-
-At Port-of-Spain the boys all received letters from home and sent long
-communications in return. They related all their various adventures but
-touched lightly upon the perils encountered.
-
-“It’s no use of scaring the folks to death,” was the way in which Mark
-put it. “What’s past is past, and let that end it.”
-
-“That’s true,” said Darry. “Besides, if we said too much our folks
-might write to us to come home on the next steamer.”
-
-The only one of the party who was at all downcast was Hockley. This
-youth had hoped to meet Dan Markel and get back at least some of his
-property. Now he felt that the chance of doing this was slipping away
-forever.
-
-“By the time we get back to the coast he’ll be gone for good--and
-nobody will know where,” he said.
-
-“Well, why don’t you go back to Caracas and hunt for him,” returned
-Frank. “We’re not compelling you to go along.”
-
-“Oh, don’t blow about it,” cried Hockley, angrily. “I’ll do what I
-please, without advice from you.”
-
-“The man may turn up yet,” put in Mark. “I don’t think he’d come to
-Venezuela without he had some object in so doing.”
-
-“I heard him say something about a gold mine once,” said Sam. “Perhaps
-he thought to try his luck in that direction--after he found he had to
-settle down.”
-
-“His gold mine is out of somebody else’s pocket,” grumbled Hockley, and
-walked away, amid a laugh which could not be repressed.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIV
-
-UP THE RIVER TO BOLIVAR
-
-
-There are several ways of entering the Orinoco proper, but the main
-stream is the Boca de Navios, flowing eastward into the Atlantic. This
-great body of water is cut into two channels, each about two miles
-wide, by a series of islands, some little more than marshlands and
-others hilly and covered with heavy tropical growths.
-
-“The exact length of the Orinoco is not known,” said the professor, in
-reply to a question from Mark. “It would be a difficult matter to reach
-its source, which is located somewhere in the Sierra Parime Mountains,
-thousands of feet up among the clouds. Roughly speaking the stream
-proper is almost two thousand miles long.”
-
-“But we can’t sail that far, can we?” asked Hockley.
-
-“By no means. Bolivar, for which we are now bound, marks the head of
-tide water, and there we will have to take a smaller vessel, even
-though the river at that point is several miles wide and over three
-hundred feet deep. Bolivar is about two hundred and fifty miles from
-the ocean, and about half way to where the Orinoco is joined by
-the Apure River, in the west. From this point the Orinoco branches
-southward, through a country of _llanos_ and immense forests, until
-it approaches the Sierra Parime Mountains, where it is much broken by
-cascades and rocky canyons. At this point there is a small stream, the
-Casiquiare, which connects with the Rio Negro, a large river flowing
-into the Amazon of Brazil.”
-
-“Are there many towns on the river?” questioned Frank.
-
-“Towns, yes, but no cities worth mentioning. Along the upper Orinoco
-the inhabitants are mostly natives who raise stock and gather cocoa
-beans, tonqua beans--used for soaps and perfumes--and fruits. To the
-southward, are immense forests where rubber is found, and in the
-mountains are the valuable mines which we have already mentioned. Some
-of these mines are held to be worth ten to twenty millions of dollars
-each.”
-
-“Gracious! I wouldn’t mind owning one of those myself,” said Darry, in
-a low voice.
-
-“In years gone by the Spaniards worked these mines and drew from them
-a wealth that amazed the whole of Europe. But through revolutions and
-earthquakes many of the mines were abandoned and forgotten, and to this
-day some which are known to have been exceedingly valuable cannot be
-located.”
-
-“I say, let us try to locate one of them!” cried Frank,
-enthusiastically.
-
-“I don’t think you’ll have much luck,” responded the professor, dryly.
-“Many of the best of miners have tried and failed.”
-
-Mark turned to Andy Hume, who sat close by, smoking a short briar-root
-pipe.
-
-“Is that your game, Mr. Hume?” he asked.
-
-“Andy Hume, please,” returned the old miner. “Never could get used to a
-handle to my name nohow.” He blew a cloud of smoke into the air. “Wall,
-about that being my game, it is and it isn’t. I’m going prospecting,
-and I don’t care if I strike something new or something old so long
-as it pans out good. I’ve heard tell of those old Spanish mines and
-of all the bloodshed it cost to get the gold out of ’em and out of
-the country. In those days a man wasn’t safe if he had over a hundred
-dollars’ worth of dust on his person. And even when he got out of the
-country he wasn’t certain but what some pirate would capture the ship
-he was sailing on and make him walk the plank to Davy Jones’ locker.”
-
-“I wish we were going with you,” said Darry, impulsively.
-
-“Thank you, lad, but the life wouldn’t suit you nohow. It’s not easy.
-Prospecting is dangerous work, and I’ve seen the time when I got lost
-in the mountains and didn’t have a bite to eat for forty-eight hours.
-That’s an experience that’s enough to drive one crazy.”
-
-“I suppose it is. But if you strike it rich--”
-
-“Ah, yes, if you do strike it. But you don’t more often than you do.”
-
-“Did you ever strike luck in our own country?” asked Hockley, who was
-as interested as anybody in the conversation.
-
-“Yes, twice. Once I was in the Cripple Creek district and found a
-nugget worth two thousand dollars. Another time I was up on Lone
-Man’s Ledge and located the Daisy Mine with a fellow named Bargess.
-The Daisy proved to be a splendid payer and we took out ten thousand
-dollars’ worth of dust in less than two weeks. Both Bargess and me were
-delighted I can tell you. I went down to town to prove up the claim
-and while I was gone what did Bargess do but gather all the gold in
-sight and run away to Mexico with it.”
-
-“But he had to leave the mine,” said Darry.
-
-“He did, but it never paid as well as it had at the start, and I
-stopped working it six weeks later. I wish I could find Bargess.”
-
-“You never heard of him afterward?”
-
-“Never a word, excepting that somebody had once seen him in Mexico at a
-town called La Dardado. If I should run across him I think there would
-be some warm work the next few minutes,” added the old miner, pointedly.
-
-The accommodations on the steamer, while not elegant, were yet
-sufficient for comfort, and the days passed swiftly enough to the boys.
-Mark and Darry were studying Spanish, for they felt that a knowledge of
-the language would be of great use to them. Frank and Sam also studied
-a little. Hockley was too lazy to occupy himself in any manner. Seeking
-a shady corner of the deck he would stretch out at full length and
-sleep from one hour’s end to the next.
-
-“He certainly believes in taking it easy,” said Sam to Darry, as they
-happened to pass the youth. “Of one thing you can be sure, he’ll never
-kill himself by overwork.”
-
-“I don’t suppose he’ll have to, if his father is as rich as he
-pretends. But the heat has got something to do with his laziness. It’s
-terrific.”
-
-“Well, we can’t expect anything different for we are within seven or
-eight degrees of the equator. If it wasn’t for the nights I don’t see
-how any of us could stand it.”
-
-Although the river was wide, the steamer moved along the channel slowly
-and with caution. This was done because of the numerous bars and snags
-which form to impede navigation--just as they sometimes form on the
-Mississippi and Missouri of our own country.
-
-“It is said that once this river country was populated by great tribes
-of Indians that have to-day totally disappeared,” said the professor.
-“They were a peaceful nation, living on the fruit which abounded on
-every side, on the numerous fish which the river afforded, and on
-the small wild animals found in the forests. But soon after Columbus
-discovered the land, the Spaniards came over with a thirst for gold and
-power, and that was the end of a peace which had perhaps reigned for
-centuries.”
-
-“What of a pre-historic civilization here?” asked Sam.
-
-“Some few traces have been found, but not many. The civilization was
-confined more directly to the western coast of the country and to
-Central America. But even of that the most is lost, and lost perhaps
-forever.”
-
-The outlook along the lower Orinoco is not inviting, and the boys soon
-tired of it. Either bank was lined with grass and reeds, with here
-and there a patch of wild brushwood, the home of birds innumerable.
-Pelicans were there, and wild ducks, and there was an odor of heated
-salt-meadow water which was at times almost overpowering. In the
-distance were immense forests, but so far off that nothing about them
-could be clearly distinguished.
-
-“Set a fellow ashore along there and he could get lost without half
-trying,” observed Mark. “How awfully lonesome it looks.”
-
-“Spare me from getting lost!” said Frank, with something like a shiver.
-“I just want to have a good time and nothing else.”
-
-To help pass the time, the professor brought out one of the guns and
-some ammunition and let them take turns at shooting the wild birds as
-they came within reasonable distance, at the same time giving the lads
-several necessary lessons in aiming.
-
-“Don’t be in a hurry,” he cautioned to Frank. “Be quick, but not too
-quick, is a good huntsman’s motto. Now try your hand at the pelican
-yonder.”
-
-Frank took careful aim and fired, but missed his mark. Then Darry tried
-and the big water bird was hit in the wing, and speedily dove out of
-sight among the reeds.
-
-“Please let me try at something else,” pleaded Frank, and when another
-bird came in range the professor did so. The youth was now more careful
-and the bird came down like a stone. But it fell into the river and
-could not be secured.
-
-The shooting lasted all of an hour and at the conclusion Professor
-Strong declared himself well satisfied with results. “No one is such a
-terribly bad shot,” he said. “And a little practice will do wonders, as
-you will soon learn.”
-
-When the town of Bolivar was reached the boys were surprised to find it
-located on a bluff, sixty or seventy feet above the river level. It is
-a very ancient place and boasts of a fortress built by the Spaniards
-ages ago.
-
-“The town is built so high up on account of the swelling of the
-stream during the wet season,” said Professor Strong. “When the rains
-are extra severe the river rises fifty and even sixty feet and often
-carries away large sections of plantations along its bank.”
-
-“There seems to be plenty of shipping,” observed Mark. “There are ships
-here of a dozen nationalities.”
-
-“Bolivar is the custom-house port for the whole of the Orinoco, which
-accounts for all those ships being here. The territory to be covered
-being so vast, an immense amount of business is done, amounting to
-millions of dollars annually. Gold is exported in large quantities.
-There are a dozen factories where cigars and stogies are made.”
-
-They were soon ashore and climbing the hilly street to one of the
-hotels. It was a busy scene, and quite like New York, so Mark declared,
-on account of the various nationalities to be seen,--American and
-English miners, German shipping merchants, French and Italian shop and
-hotel keepers, and negro and other native workmen, all intermingling in
-the most friendly manner.
-
-“Everybody seems to be smoking,” said Darry. “Negroes, priests, women
-and all. I never dreamed of such a sight. And some of those workmen
-haven’t clothing enough to be decent,” he added, in some disgust.
-
-By inquiries at a shipping office it was learned that no steamer for
-up the river could be had until two days later. This would give them a
-chance to inspect the city buildings, the parks, and other points of
-interest.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXV
-
-SOMETHING ABOUT COCOA AND CHOCOLATE
-
-
-“Before we go any further up the river I wish you boys to visit a cocoa
-plantation and learn something about cocoa and chocolate,” said the
-professor on the following morning. “There is a large plantation not
-many miles from here, and we will take a drive to it in a carriage
-immediately after breakfast.”
-
-At this announcement all were pleased but Hockley, who drew down the
-corners of his mouth in disapproval.
-
-“It will be dead slow,” he muttered. “I’d rather see the sights in the
-town.”
-
-“We will view those later,” replied the professor. He had no intention
-of leaving the tall youth behind again, and Hockley realized it and
-made no further remonstrance.
-
-The plantation was a large affair, situated upon a small creek flowing
-into the Orinoco. It was owned by a German merchant doing business in
-Bolivar, and it was the merchant himself who showed them around the
-place.
-
-“As you can see,” said Professor Strong, when they were walking around,
-“the cocoa is set out very much as is coffee. The seeds are planted
-in a seed-bed and kept there two or three months. Then the shoots are
-planted in the field, between shade trees, with ditches cut through the
-field for irrigating purposes. The trees begin to bear in about five
-years and with care will last for thirty-five to forty years.”
-
-“But where does the chocolate come in?” interrupted Hockley.
-
-“Chocolate is made from the seed of the cocoa pod, so called. This pod,
-as you can see, is about the shape of a cantelope, and when ripe, is
-reddish in color. Each pod contains fifty or seventy-five seeds, each
-the size of one’s thumb nail. The trees give two crops a year, one in
-June and the other in December.”
-
-“Do they use the beans as they are?” came from Sam.
-
-“No. After the pods are gathered they are placed in the sun to dry. As
-soon as they burst open the beans are shelled out and sorted. Some
-growers then bag them and sell them in that shape, but others declare
-that the best cocoa is produced by placing the beans in the ground
-until they are about half rotted. Cocoa, such as we drink at home, is
-made by breaking the beans up, or shaving them fine, and then boiling
-in water or milk, and serving with sugar. Chocolate is made by mixing
-the crushed up beans with sugar and with some spices, to give it a
-special flavor. Of course you all know cake chocolate and chocolate
-bonbons. Cake chocolate unsweetened is generally cocoa beans ground up
-and mixed with flour or other foreign substances to give it weight.
-Sweet chocolate cakes have sugar, honey and very often some spices in
-them. Bonbons are made of cocoa, sugar, flavoring extracts and anything
-else the wide-awake confectioner chooses to put into them to strike
-the palate of his customer. Cocoa and chocolate, if pure, are very
-nourishing, and have none of the bad effects on the system that are
-attributed to coffee.”
-
-“What is cacao?” asked Frank.
-
-“That is only another name for cocoa, Newton. Cocoa often grows in
-a wild state, but the beans are not as large as when cultivated. In
-some districts, where money is scarce, cocoa beans are used instead
-in buying and selling. A native will gather all the beans he can in
-a little bag and then come into town and barter them for whatever he
-wants--and there was a time when he could pay his taxes in beans.”
-
-“Well, that isn’t so very strange,” put in Darry. “In revolutionary
-times in our own country, they used to pay taxes and other demands in
-corn and grain.”
-
-“Yes, and they pay taxes now, in country places, by working on the
-public highways,” added Frank.
-
-The walk around the cocoa plantation proved full of interest, and when
-it was concluded and they had taken some of the bitter-sweet beans from
-a tree as souvenirs the proprietor of the place invited them to lunch
-in his summer-house, an affair built in true German style under the
-wide spreading branches of a royal palm.
-
-“In my _gartenlaube_ you shall drink chocolate that is chocolate,” said
-their host. “Not the chocolate you often get at home, adulterated with
-pipe-clay or something like that, but that which is made from the pure
-bean mixed with the cleanest of sugar.”
-
-He was as good as his word, and with the creamy chocolate came German
-coffee-cake equally good. All of the boys drank the chocolate eagerly,
-and Frank could not help but smack his lips over it.
-
-“I never tasted anything better,” he declared. “If I could get it as
-good at home I’d never touch coffee again,” and Mark said the same.
-
-Their host was a talkative man, and wished to know all about their
-proposed trip up the river.
-
-“You will see many interesting sights,” he said. “I have been up
-twice--four years ago and two years ago. The last time I went up the
-natives were having a bitter quarrel among themselves and I had all I
-could do to keep out of trouble. But generally they are very friendly
-and will do anything for you if you pay them fair wages.”
-
-On returning to the city they met Andy Hume, who had been interviewing
-a number of miners who had just come in from one of the mining
-districts.
-
-“They’ve struck two new mines,” he said, “and both good payers. I
-pumped ’em pretty thoroughly and I think I can strike something good if
-I go right at it. I wish the boat sailed to-day instead of to-morrow.”
-
-“You’ll have to be patient,” said Professor Strong, with a smile. “I
-fancy you will find plenty of unexplored territory when you get there.”
-
-With so many things to look at the time slipped by quickly. An hour
-was spent the next day at one of the cigar factories, where the boys
-watched the workmen roll cigars and pack them in boxes. But the smell
-was so strong that Frank and Sam came away more than half sick.
-
-“I can’t imagine how they can stand it to work in such a place,” said
-Frank. “It’s enough to sicken a dog.”
-
-“It is what they get used to,” said Mark. “But I must say I didn’t like
-it myself.”
-
-At last came the time to bid adieu to Bolivar, which in former days was
-called Angostura. They went aboard the little paddle-box steamer loaded
-with bundles, for they had left their trunks at the hotel, to remain
-there until their return.
-
-“I suppose that’s the last of civilization,” remarked Frank. “Now for
-the forests and a good time hunting, fishing, and camping out.”
-
-“You mustn’t be quite so fast,” said the professor, with a laugh. “It
-will be at least a week before we reach any place for hunting and
-fishing. Of course we could stop off on the way, but I take it you boys
-wish to get right into the mountains.”
-
-“So we do,” came from several of the others.
-
-“This boat will make a number of stops first--at Muitogo, at
-Altagracia, at Caicara, where the river Apure joins the Orinoco, and
-at points of lesser importance, until we reach the Meta River, which
-runs into Colombia. At that point we will disembark and hire a native
-boat to take us up into the mountains as far as we care to go, past the
-Falls of Atures and into a region which is even to-day but little known
-to the outside world.”
-
-“And how many miles shall we sail to get to the mountains?” asked Darry.
-
-“About six hundred from here.”
-
-“And after that how far shall we go?” questioned Hockley.
-
-“As far as we please. You all wish to see what a tropical jungle is
-like, and wish to hunt and fish, and I am going to do my best to
-accommodate you. If all goes well, we will have some excellent sport
-between now and the time we return,” concluded Professor Strong.
-
-To the boys, impatient to get into the forests, the time on the
-side-wheeler went but slowly. Day after day was spent on deck, gazing
-at the vast plains on one side of the river and the forest on the
-other. They made the stops mentioned, and also several others, but
-none of the party went ashore, for the heat was terrific.
-
-“We can’t get out of this too quick for me,” said Hockley. “I feel
-about half fried out already.”
-
-“The climate changes as one nears the mountains,” returned the
-professor. “You won’t suffer so much in a few days,” and his
-words proved true. As they came in sight of the first of the
-mountains--really the foothills of the Andes--the thermometer dropped
-half a dozen degrees and the nights proved all that could be desired.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVI
-
-CAMPING ON THE UPPER ORINOCO
-
-
-“What a truly grand sight!”
-
-It was Mark who uttered the words. He stood in the bow of a long canoe,
-manned by a single Indian, who was sending the craft along the bosom of
-the silent river with skill and swiftness.
-
-On each side of the canoe the dark waters of the upper Orinoco
-stretched to a distance of a hundred yards or more. Beyond were
-gigantic forests of mahogany, rose-wood, grenadilla, ebony, and rubber
-trees. Beneath the trees were immense ferns and strange varicolored
-mosses, and over and through all grew the ever-present tropical vines,
-forming meshes which were well-nigh impassable.
-
-The sun shone far to the westward, but the river lay in a deep shadow,
-and the many birds which had sung so gaily during the day had ceased
-their song, giving place to the sounds of the oncoming night. Far in
-the distance some wild parrots screeched out boldly, and many monkeys
-added a chorus of their own. As Mark gazed at a tree which stood at
-the bend of the stream he saw something uncurl itself and drop into the
-water with a slight splash.
-
-“What was that?” he asked of the professor, who was nearest to him.
-
-“That was a water snake, Robertson. An ugly creature, too, if you meet
-him in his native element.”
-
-“Ugh, a snake! Then I guess we won’t land there.”
-
-“The Indian says he knows of a nice spot a mile beyond here, where
-there is a cleared place on the brow of a little bluff. To camp in the
-midst of such a jungle as this would be very unwise.”
-
-For three days the party had been traveling along the upper Orinoco in
-the canoe, which was a stout affair, over twenty feet long and with a
-little hood in the stern for protection from the sun. The last village
-at which they had stopped had been left ten miles behind and here they
-had bidden adieu to Andy Hume, who was in another boat and who wished
-to explore one of the many tributaries of the Orinoco which join the
-mighty stream at this point.
-
-The trip in the canoe had been full of interest. They passed several
-rapids, and at one point had had to “tote” the canoe and its contents
-around a picturesque waterfall. They had gone fishing under the
-directions of the Indian, whose name was Cubara, and had brought in
-a fine mess, which had been cooked over the camp-fire in true hunter
-fashion. They had even gone hunting and each of the boys had brought
-down several tropical birds of gorgeous plumage. They had wanted to go
-swimming, but this the professor had not allowed, fearing there might
-be something in the water to harm them.
-
-The Indian was a knowing fellow and bright, although not given to much
-talking. He had been selected by the professor because of his knowledge
-of English, which was, however, slight. He took particularly to Frank,
-who had given him a pocket looking-glass he chanced to have with him.
-
-“Well I wish we were landed,” grumbled Hockley, who sat under the hood
-of the canoe, taking it easy. “I am tired of this everlasting water.
-There is a sameness that is perfectly sickening.”
-
-“That’s because you don’t enjoy the beauties of nature,” returned
-Darry, with a grin. “You haven’t the poetic temperament, so to speak.”
-
-“You needn’t poke fun at me,” growled the lank youth, with a scowl. “I
-say there is sameness, and there is. It’s been nothing but water and
-trees ever since we started.”
-
-“If I were you, Hockley, I’d get out and wade back,” put in Frank. “I
-can’t imagine what made you come.”
-
-“I came to have a good time, but it’s no good time drifting in a canoe
-like this,” was the surly response. “If we were ashore--”
-
-“We’ll soon be ashore,” interrupted Mark. “There is the bluff, just
-around the bend. Cubara is right, it’s an ideal spot for camping out.”
-
-“If there isn’t a puma there waiting to chew us up,” added Frank, but
-the smile on his face showed that he was not particularly afraid.
-
-The canoe was run in among the bushes lining the bank below the bluff,
-and leaping ashore the Indian pulled the craft well out of the water.
-Then one after another leaped to the dry ground beyond.
-
-“Leave the baggage where it is for the present,” said the professor. “I
-want to take a look around before I decide to pitch camp. There may be
-some objection which Cubara has overlooked.”
-
-But there was none, and soon they had everything ashore and up to the
-edge of the bluff, which arose from the surrounding jungle to a height
-of thirty feet. To one side of the bluff was a series of rough rocks
-leading down to the river and on the other was a beautiful waterfall
-coming from a mountain a mile or more to the eastward. On the other
-side of the Orinoco the virgin forests stretched for miles.
-
-As in all tropical localities night came on swiftly, and by the time
-they had brought all their things to the top of the bluff and started
-a camp-fire darkness was upon them, lit up only by a few bright stars
-far overhead. They had brought with them a fair sized tent and Sam and
-Darry were soon hard at work cutting the necessary poles for erecting
-the shelter.
-
-“These forests look as if they had never seen the axe of a woodsman,”
-said Sam. “What immense trees! Some of them must be two hundred feet
-high.”
-
-The poles were soon cut and then the erection of the tent began. It was
-placed at a point where the ground sloped a little, which would allow
-the water to run off in case it rained. It was fastened down with extra
-heavy stakes so that nothing short of a hurricane would be able to
-level it.
-
-The tent erected, they took the most valuable of their stores inside,
-piling them up at the rear. There was a case for their guns, another
-containing ammunition, and a third medicines, and also several bundles
-of clothing. They had also brought with them a number of canned goods,
-coffee, sugar, salt and some jerked beef, in case they should be unable
-to bring down their own meat. The jerked beef had been purchased at
-Apure, where there is a large market for beef, both “on the hoof” and
-prepared. Among the stores were also a bag of flour and a small bag of
-beans--the latter brought along by Sam, who declared that he was going
-to have his usual Sunday morning delicacy, no matter what happened.
-
-It was decided by the professor that throughout their stay in the
-jungle each should take his turn at watching during the night. “There
-are seven of us all told,” he said. “And that will give each only about
-an hour apiece, which will be no hardship. Perhaps nothing will come to
-disturb us, but with one on guard all the others will be able to sleep
-in comfort.”
-
-The first night in the camp passed without anything unusual occurring.
-The boys were up bright and early, and Mark discovered a pool at the
-foot of the waterfall where they might bathe and wash to their hearts’
-content. The water was as cool as it was pure and refreshed them
-wonderfully.
-
-“Makes a fellow feel like living again,” cried Darry, as he splashed
-around. “I presume that water comes from the very top of yonder
-mountain.”
-
-“No doubt of it,” returned Mark, “and some of it may be melted snow for
-all we know.”
-
-Hockley had been too lazy to take a bath, and still lay on the flooring
-of the tent, snoring lustily. To wake him up, Darry went and pulled him
-by the foot.
-
-“Hi, you, let go!” cried the sleepy youth, as he sat up. “Can’t you let
-me sleep?”
-
-“Time for breakfast,” returned Darry. “We’ve had a bath.”
-
-“Have you? Well, I’m not so dirty as all that. After this you let me
-sleep as long as I please.”
-
-“All right,” returned Darry, coolly. And as he turned away he added,
-in an undertone to Frank: “What a perfect bear he is! I wish he had
-remained at home.”
-
-“So do I,” was the answer. “But as he is with us we’ll have to make the
-best of it.”
-
-While the others were getting breakfast Hockley began leisurely to
-dress himself. He had pulled on one shoe and was holding the other
-when of a sudden he gave a cry of terror and leaped up wildly.
-
-[Illustration: “Take it off! Take it off!”]
-
-“Take it off! Take it off!”
-
-“What is it?” demanded the professor, quickly, and rushed to his side.
-
-“I don’t know what it is. It crawled out of my shoe. Take it off!”
-
-He pointed to a creature four or five inches long, with many legs and
-with horned jaws, which rested on his knee, shaking its tiny head from
-one side to the other.
-
-“A centipede!” murmured Professor Strong, and doubling up his finger he
-snapped the thing to the ground and there quickly stamped on it.
-
-“A centipede!” bawled Hockley. “They’re poisonous, so I’ve heard. I--I
-think he bit me in the back of the hand. Do you think that if he did it
-will prove fa-fatal?” And he turned pale.
-
-“I don’t think so, Hockley. Let me see your hand.”
-
-“Yes, sir. But hadn’t we better get out of here? There may be more
-around?”
-
-“We might go where there are more instead of less. Venezuela is full of
-centipedes, and some of them are dangerous. But that wasn’t such a big
-fellow, and your hand seems to be all right. They won’t bite a human
-being unless they are pushed to it, and some natives do not mind the
-bites at all.”
-
-“No hurt me,” put in Cubara, with a smile. “Some of my people eat
-dem--no poison much, no,” and he shook his head vigorously.
-
-“I don’t want any more of them,” growled Hockley. “What a nasty looking
-thing--with so many legs!”
-
-“You always want to shake out everything you wear before you put it
-on,” said the professor, to all of the boys. “If you don’t you may
-encounter scorpions and tarantulas as well as centipedes. They are the
-great drawbacks to almost every hot country.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVII
-
-BRINGING DOWN AN OCELOT
-
-
-The centipede scare had been almost too much for Hockley, and he hardly
-ate a mouthful of the breakfast which the others prepared.
-
-“It’s a nasty country--I’m sorry I came here,” he told Mark. “I
-expected a better time.”
-
-“Well you are here and that’s the end of it,” was the simple answer.
-“But perhaps things won’t be so bad after we get used to it.”
-
-“I thought it would be like hunting in the mountains of Pennsylvania.
-I once went out there and had a fine time, bringing down small game
-and fishing for trout. But that awfully big jungle--” Hockley did not
-finish, but his look of fear was more impressive than words.
-
-However, the breakfast passed off pleasantly enough and inside of an
-hour all the boys were at the river bank, baiting their hooks under the
-direction of Cubara, who told them that he had once made his living as
-a fisherman.
-
-“I catch de fish in de mountains,” he said. “Sell dem to de gold
-miners. Da no take time to fish, so pay big price.”
-
-“I suppose the miners don’t care to do anything but hunt for gold,”
-remarked Frank.
-
-“Hunt, hunt, hunt, night an’ day,” was the answer. “Some go ’way up
-de big mountains, stay dare many, many moons, come back, no gold, all
-crazy.”
-
-“Crazy!”
-
-“Yes, crazy, stay alone so long, no want dat to fish for him. He crazy,
-maybe he kill!” And Cubara shrugged his bony shoulders.
-
-“That’s a cheerful outlook for Andy Hume,” murmured Mark. “I sincerely
-hope he doesn’t go crazy through loneliness.”
-
-“I have heard of such cases in our own country,” put in the professor.
-“Some miners went crazy during the gold fever in California, and only
-a few months ago I was reading in the newspapers of a prospector
-in Alaska who had gone insane through having lost himself in the
-mountains. It is no child’s play--this trying to make nature yield up
-her secrets.”
-
-Fishing lasted all of the morning, and by noon they had twenty-odd
-specimens of the finny tribe in a pool of fresh water among the
-rocks. Most of the catch were of the perch variety, although somewhat
-different from the class usually found in our own streams.
-
-“Haven’t run across any of those wonderful electric eels,” said
-Hockley. “I thought we’d be sure to be shocked to death,” he added,
-with a sniff.
-
-“Electric eels not here,” said Cubara. “Take you to dem udder day
-maybe.”
-
-“I want to go hunting first,” put in Sam. He was longing to shoot
-something big.
-
-“We’ll go hunting this afternoon,” said the professor.
-
-“I don’t care to go hunting,” said Hockley. “I’d rather take it easy
-to-day.”
-
-“Very well, then, you may remain in camp with Cubara, Hockley.”
-
-The dinner was rather a hasty one, and a short while later Professor
-Strong and four of the boys set out. Each was armed with a rifle or
-shotgun, and each carried some food for supper, should they not return
-until late.
-
-The professor had had a long talk with the Indian regarding the game in
-the vicinity, and Cubara had told him where they were likely to find
-a number of peccaries, a wild animal common to many parts of Venezuela
-and one much sought after by the natives for food. The peccary is not
-unlike a wild hog in general appearance, and when full grown weighs
-from fifty to sixty pounds. They are very fierce when attacked and have
-short tusks which are as sharp as daggers.
-
-The way was up the mountain side behind the camp, over tall rocks
-and around spots where the undergrowth was absolutely impenetrable.
-Overhead the sun shone down from a cloudless sky, yet under the
-gigantic trees not a ray was to be found, so thick was the foliage.
-
-As they advanced the constant screeching of green parrots reached
-their ears, mingled with the distant pandemonium created by a tribe of
-howling monkeys.
-
-“What a noise they make,” cried Darry. “I never heard such a racket in
-my life.”
-
-“Those monkeys are the genuine ring-tail howling monkeys,” laughed the
-professor. “They are the pest of a hunter’s camp. When once they make
-up their mind to serenade you at night nothing short of a hurricane can
-stop them. Their howl, heard in the darkness, is the most mournful
-sound on earth, ten times worse than that of a dog baying at the moon.”
-
-“Are they dangerous?” asked Sam.
-
-“Not generally speaking, although you want to be careful of what you do
-to them. A shot from a gun will sometimes scatter them for an hour or
-so. But if you pick up a stone and hurl it at them, they will surely
-pick up other stones to hurl at you in return.”
-
-In two hours they had covered a distance of several miles. Nothing had
-been seen of peccaries, and somewhat disheartened they came to a halt
-near the bank of a mountain torrent which, at that point, formed a pool
-several rods in extent.
-
-“Hush!” said the professor suddenly. “Get down behind the bushes. There
-is a fine shot for all of us.”
-
-They dropped down, and then gazed in the direction he pointed out.
-Sitting on some tall bushes overhanging the opposite side of the pool
-were a number of birds almost as large as wild turkeys. They were
-bluish in color, with a greenish tinge under the throat fading to
-white. On the head of each was a crest of yellow which looked like
-gold.
-
-“What beauties!” murmured Sam.
-
-“Ready, all of you,” came from the professor. “Take aim. Fire!”
-
-The word was not yet out of his mouth when the birds became alarmed
-and started to rise. But at the volley two dropped into the water dead
-while two others fluttered helplessly among the trees. The professor
-and Mark ran after the latter and after some trouble put them to death
-and brought them in. In the meantime those in the pool were also
-secured.
-
-“These birds are crested curassows, or hoccos,” said the professor.
-“Some of them are the color of those we have shot but the majority are
-black. They are very numerous in Venezuela, Guiana, and Brazil, and a
-great many people keep them as we do tame turkeys, and the meat is very
-much the same.”
-
-“Hurrah for the turkey meat!” exclaimed Frank. “That will be a change
-from our fish diet.”
-
-With the curassows slung over their backs they proceeded on their way,
-around the pool and up the mountain torrent, to where there was a small
-stretch of table-land. From this point they could obtain a clear view
-of the surrounding country for many miles.
-
-“There is the Orinoco,” said Mark, pointing to the stream as it
-glistened in the sunlight. “But the hill is between us and our camp.”
-
-On the table-land they brought down a score of birds, including a
-trogon, a beautiful creature of black, green and gold, with long,
-sweeping tail; a pair of birds of the sparrow-hawk variety; and several
-humming-birds.
-
-“These humming-birds are called the ruby and topaz,” said Professor
-Strong. “They are hunted down by the thousands each year and are used
-in the decoration, principally, of ladies’ hats.”
-
-“They are certainly pretty,” said Sam. “But what a shame to slaughter
-them in such a wholesale fashion.”
-
-“All sorts of tropical birds are slaughtered merely for the purposes
-of the milliner,” went on the professor. “It is certainly a shame, but
-so long as the ladies demand feathers on their hats the slaughter will
-probably continue.”
-
-Leaving the table-land they plunged again into the forest. The
-professor had found tracks which he felt certain belonged to some wild
-animals, and as they advanced each held his gun ready for use should
-the occasion require.
-
-The occasion was not long in coming. Directly in front of them was a
-fallen tree, a veritable monarch of the forest, all of nine feet in
-diameter and with branches spreading in all directions. As they were
-making their way around the roots of this tree they heard a low snarl
-of rage and saw a wild beast not unlike a huge cat leap from the roots
-with another wild beast in its mouth.
-
-Crack! went the professor’s rifle and the bullet hit the beast in the
-forepaw. At once it dropped its prey--an armadillo--and faced around
-with another snarl of rage more fierce than ever.
-
-“He’s coming for us!” yelled Mark, and fired his own gun. But his aim
-was not true and the bullet merely grazed the beast’s tail.
-
-By this time the ocelot--for such the animal proved to be--was up on
-the tree trunk, glaring directly down upon them. He was closer to Frank
-than to anyone else, and it looked as if he would leap upon the youth
-without further delay.
-
-It must be confessed that Frank was badly frightened. But he did not
-lose his total presence of mind, and almost mechanically he lifted the
-shotgun he carried and blazed away. At the same time Sam and Darry
-fired, and between the three the ocelot was mortally wounded and
-rolled to the ground, growling and snarling in a fashion fearful to
-contemplate. Then the professor rushed in and with a shot at short
-range finished the beast.
-
-“Say, but that was a close call all around,” came from Mark, when the
-excitement was over.
-
-“That’s what it was,” returned Frank, breathing heavily. “I don’t want
-to get in such close quarters again. I thought sure he was going to nab
-me.”
-
-The professor was much vexed that his first shot had not killed the
-ocelot. “I must be getting rusty in my shooting,” he said.
-
-The armadillo was limping away on three legs, for the ocelot had bitten
-it severely through the hind quarters. But before it could get very
-far, Darry and Sam went after it and brought it low. Then they dragged
-it back by its tail and laid it beside the larger beast.
-
-The ocelot was a beautiful specimen, measuring four feet from nose to
-tip of tail. It was of a greyish fawn color, with stripes and patches
-of black. The eyes were yellowish brown, full and round. The boys could
-well imagine how they might glitter in the darkness of night.
-
-“This creature belongs to the leopard family,” said the professor,
-while reloading his rifle. “They are very powerful, and frequently
-attack animals twice their size. There are a number of varieties, and
-some go by the common name of tiger cats. The skins are very valuable
-for rugs and other purposes.”
-
-“What about the meat?” questioned Darry.
-
-“The natives eat the meat of almost every wild beast. Personally I have
-never tried ocelot steaks, although I have been told they are fairly
-good eating.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVIII
-
-MONKEYS AND A CANOE
-
-
-After the bringing down of the ocelot several days passed without
-anything unusual happening. The boys went hunting and fishing to their
-heart’s content and brought down many small animals, but nothing of
-great importance outside of a pair of peccaries, which were found in
-a hollow tree by Sam and brought down by him and Darry. The peccary
-proved to be sweet eating, and Cubara was particularly pleased to get
-the meat.
-
-“Werry nice him,” he said. “Love him werry much. Eat him ev’ry day fo’
-many, many moons.”
-
-“Perhaps you could,” answered Darry. “But I’d get mighty sick of it in
-a couple of days.”
-
-Frank and Mark had been planning to go hunting on their own account,
-further up the river, and at last obtained the professor’s permission
-to use the canoe for that purpose.
-
-“But you must be very careful, boys,” said Professor Strong. “Do not
-go ashore unless you are sure of your ground, and come back before
-sunset.”
-
-“We’ll remember,” said Frank. “We only want to go along the river bank
-for a mile or two.”
-
-In coming up to the camp both Frank and Mark had taken instructions
-from Cubara concerning the handling of the canoe, so they had no
-difficulty in embarking and paddling up the river, which so far as eye
-could reach was as smooth as a mill-pond excepting where the mountain
-torrent ran into it over the bluff.
-
-“If only we can bring down a puma or something like that,” said Frank,
-as they left the camp behind. “Won’t the others be envious!”
-
-“We’d have our hands full with a puma I’m thinking,” returned Mark.
-“Why they are just like the panthers of our own country. We had better
-try for something smaller first.”
-
-The camp was soon out of sight, around a turn of the stream, and then
-they pulled in close to shore, to see if they could find any trace of
-something worth shooting.
-
-“This is slow,” remarked Mark, after a long silence, during which they
-had paddled the best part of a mile. “I haven’t seen a single thing
-worth mentioning.”
-
-“Nor I. I have half a mind to throw a line overboard and go fishing,”
-replied Frank.
-
-“All right, do so, and I’ll paddle for awhile.”
-
-The line was baited and thrown into the water. Scarcely had it sunk a
-yard when there came a nibble and a pull which almost caused Frank to
-go overboard.
-
-“I’ve got something big now!” gasped Frank, holding on to the line with
-one hand and the canoe seat with the other.
-
-“What is it?” questioned Mark, quickly.
-
-“I don’t know, but it pulls like a whale.”
-
-“Let me help you,” continued Mark, and dropped the paddle on the bottom
-of the canoe. Then both tried to haul in the line, but before they
-could do so there was a swish in the water and a big, black object
-appeared for a moment, a black object with a greenish head and sharp
-greenish eyes. At this both lads fell back in dismay.
-
-“A water snake!” cried Mark. “And a big one, too. Better cut him loose.”
-
-The canoe was now spinning up the stream, dragged by the snake who
-showed his head with the fishhook caught in one side close to the eye.
-That the reptile was angry and ready to fight there could be no doubt.
-
-As quickly as he could Frank brought out his knife and sawed away at
-the line. As it parted the snake came up again, lifting his head into
-the canoe and hissing viciously. Then he glided along the side of the
-craft, bent upon attacking Frank.
-
-Mark had his gun handy and quick as a flash he caught up the weapon.
-Bang! went the gun, and the water snake caught the charge full in the
-face. With a wild flapping he arose in the air, whipped his slimy body
-across Frank’s leg and sank out of sight into the river.
-
-For the moment the boys gazed after the reptile in a horror that no
-words can express. Frank had sunk on the seat trembling in every joint
-and Mark was equally affected.
-
-“Is he--he dead?” came at last from the younger youth.
-
-“Guess he is,” answered Mark, in a hoarse voice. “Anyway he’s gone, and
-so is the fishing line.”
-
-“I don’t care about the line, Mark. Wasn’t he awful?”
-
-“That’s what he was, Frank--the nastiest thing I ever saw in my life.”
-
-“That settles fishing for me. I wouldn’t want to catch another water
-snake for a million dollars!”
-
-It was fully five minutes before they continued on their way, and then
-they did so quietly, as if afraid a noise might bring the reptile after
-them again. But the snake failed to re-appear and soon they were a mile
-or more away from the spot.
-
-Just before encountering the snake they had noticed a tribe of monkeys
-on the shore, watching them intently. The monkeys had followed them
-for a short distance but had dropped out of sight as soon as the water
-snake appeared.
-
-“There come the monkeys again,” said Mark, presently, and he was right.
-With a strange shrieking and howling they pushed some brushwood aside
-and came close to the water’s edge, where they squatted in a long row,
-eyeing the canoe in a wondering manner and occasionally reaching out a
-paw as if beckoning the craft to come closer.
-
-“No, thank you,” said Frank, mockingly. “We don’t care to trust
-ourselves in your hands.”
-
-As they pushed up the river the monkeys followed them, still howling,
-sometimes singly and then in a deafening chorus.
-
-“There is this much about it,” said Frank, as he gazed at the
-creatures, which numbered fully a hundred. “I don’t want to land while
-they are around.”
-
-“Nor I,” answered his chum. “But we’ve got to land soon, or else go
-back. We’re at least six or seven miles from camp now, and that’s far
-enough.”
-
-“Supposing I give them a shot?”
-
-“All right, blaze away, but don’t hurt too many of them.”
-
-The shotgun was discharged and one monkey was killed and several
-wounded. Instantly the others set up a fearful screeching and fled
-in dismay, through the jungle, until their howling was lost in the
-distance.
-
-Pushing up the river a little further, the two boys landed and pulled
-their craft partly out of the water. They looked around cautiously but
-the only living creatures that appeared were a few birds and they kept
-at a safe distance.
-
-“There seems to be a sort of open trail to the northward,” said Mark.
-“Supposing we follow that? I haven’t any fancy for the jungle itself.”
-
-Frank was willing, and soon they were tramping the trail, which led up
-a hill and around a series of rocks overgrown with gigantic ferns and
-vines.
-
-“What a peculiar smell,” said Mark, after they had passed the rocks.
-“Smells for all the world like the root beer we drink at home.”
-
-“I know what it is,” answered his chum. “It’s a sassafras grove we are
-entering. The professor was telling me of them. They are common here
-and so are other barks that druggists use.”
-
-A little while later they sighted several small animals, not unlike
-hares, which crossed their pathway so rapidly that they could not get
-a shot at the creatures. Then they came to a flock of curassows and by
-skillful maneuvering got so close that they brought down three before
-the birds knew enough to take to flight.
-
-“Anyway we’ve got something for our trouble,” said Frank. “I was
-beginning to think we’d have to go back empty-handed. If we---- What’s
-that?”
-
-The youth broke off short and looked inquiringly at his chum. From a
-distance had come a peculiar roar, not unlike that of a lion or tiger.
-
-“Perhaps it’s a puma,” said Mark. “Hark! It’s coming closer!”
-
-They listened once more, and as the sound was repeated, each drew up
-his gun in readiness to fire. Then they heard a savage snarl, followed
-by a screeching and yelping.
-
-“Two wild animals fighting,” said Frank. “My how they must be chewing
-each other up!”
-
-They continued to listen and gradually the sounds became fainter and
-fainter. Then came a final roar and all became quiet.
-
-“One of them has been killed,” said Mark.
-
-“Yes, and the roaring beast is the victor,” answered Frank. “Shall we
-go ahead and try to find out what it is?”
-
-“I’d like to know what it is, but I don’t want to run any risk. If it’s
-a lion--”
-
-“There are no lions here, Frank. But it may be a jaguar, and they are
-almost as dangerous.”
-
-“In that case we had better be careful. We don’t want to be chewed up.
-Let us rest here in the open for a bit and see if he comes this way.”
-
-This was agreed to, and sitting on a rock they waited, each with his
-gun ready for use. Quarter of an hour slipped by, which seemed much
-longer to both boys. Then came a howling from the direction of the
-river.
-
-“Those rascally monkeys are coming back!” exclaimed Mark. “I hope they
-don’t come this way. We might have lots of trouble with them if they
-got to throwing stones at us.”
-
-“Oh, we can give them a shot or two if they do that.”
-
-“They seem to be having quite a time of it along the river. By ginger!
-do you think they’d bother our canoe?”
-
-“Perhaps so! Let’s go down and see if the boat is safe!”
-
-Much alarmed the two boys caught up the birds they had shot and started
-down the hill on the back trail. The road was plain so there was no
-danger of getting lost. Mark ran ahead and was the first to catch sight
-of the Orinoco at the spot where they had left their craft.
-
-The sight that met his gaze filled him with dismay. The shore was lined
-with howling monkeys who filled the air with their noise. Out in the
-stream were a score of the creatures on the canoe, howling with equal
-vigor. The paddles to the craft had been dropped overboard and the
-canoe was floating at the mercy of the wind and current.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIX
-
-LOST ON THE ORINOCO
-
-
-“Well did you ever see such impudent beggars!” cried Mark, as Frank
-reached his side. “If they haven’t gone and taken possession of our
-canoe!”
-
-“O Mark, we must get it back somehow!” ejaculated Frank, aghast. “If we
-don’t, how will we ever get back to camp?”
-
-“Of course we must get it back. But how to do it I don’t know. Come,
-let us run down the stream a bit and try to head them off.”
-
-Frank was willing enough to do anything which might give them back the
-canoe and away they started, as close to the bank of the stream as the
-jungle permitted.
-
-But the way was dark and uncertain, for the sun was now hanging over
-the forest to the westward, and they had not gone far when Frank went
-into a boggy hole up to his knees. As he sank his gun went off, the
-charge luckily passing upward through the tree branches.
-
-“What’s up?” called Mark, who had gone ahead by a somewhat different
-route.
-
-“I’m in a hole! Help me out!”
-
-“I will!”
-
-Mark was soon at his chum’s side and Frank was helped from the hole
-without much difficulty. But his going down had disturbed a number of
-ugly looking spiders and one of these bit him on the hand before he
-could brush the creature away.
-
-“Ough!” cried the boy, for the pain was intense.
-
-“Did it bite you?”
-
-“Yes.”
-
-“Too bad! But come on, or those monkeys and the canoe will be gone.”
-
-For the moment the bite of the spider, though smarting hotly, was
-forgotten and side by side they continued along the watercourse until
-they reached an inlet. Close to the river this inlet was all of fifty
-feet across and they had to make a long detour in order to avoid the
-many bog holes with which it was surrounded. All this took time and
-when they reached the Orinoco again the canoe with its load of monkeys
-was nowhere to be seen.
-
-“It’s gone!” burst out Mark. “I can’t see the canoe anywhere.”
-
-“Perhaps they are already around the bend,” suggested Frank. “Let us
-try for a short cut. It’s our only chance.”
-
-As he spoke he kept whipping his hand in the air, showing the pain he
-was suffering. Already the skin around the bite was beginning to swell.
-
-“It’s too bad, Frank,” said Mark, sympathetically. “Put some soft mud
-on it. I’ve heard that is good for bee and spider bites,” and his chum
-did as suggested. This lessened the pain but the swelling steadily
-continued.
-
-On they went through the jungle, keeping close together, for here it
-was darker than ever. Both thought they knew the course they were
-pursuing and that they would regain the stream at a point half a mile
-below where they had left it. They made no allowance for the fact that
-it is the easiest thing in the world to become completely turned around
-in any dense mass of growth where one has to turn this way and that in
-order to make progress of any sort. Old hunters are often bothered even
-in woods which they think they know thoroughly.
-
-A half mile was covered when both came to a halt in dismay. Instead of
-sighting the Orinoco they found before them a cliff of rocks twenty to
-thirty feet in height.
-
-“Hullo, we’ve made a mistake!” burst out Mark.
-
-“The river can’t be in this direction,” answered Frank. “We have got
-turned around somehow.”
-
-“Well, the river ought to be on our right.”
-
-“So it had. Let us turn in that direction.”
-
-Again they went on, fairly tearing their course through the entangling
-vines and over the rough roots of trees, sprawling in all directions.
-
-“I--I can’t go much further,” panted Frank. “I--I’m out of wind.”
-
-“I’m pretty well blown myself,” was the reply. “But we ought to be
-close to the river. Shall I go ahead and look?”
-
-“No! no! don’t leave me!”
-
-Frank moved on again, tired as he was, and thus several rods more were
-covered.
-
-“Water! The river!” cried Mark, and made a wild dash forward. But alas!
-it was not the Orinoco at all, only a long and shallow pool having
-apparently no outlet. Around the pool were a big flock of birds of
-every color imaginable, but the boys never thought to fire into the
-game.
-
-“We are on the wrong tack again!” groaned Mark. “I don’t believe the
-river is anywhere near here.”
-
-“Oh, Mark, if that is so, we are lost!”
-
-_Lost!_ It was a horrifying word. Were they really lost in that immense
-jungle, perhaps miles away from where they had left their companions?
-The face of each whitened and Frank sank down on a tree root in despair.
-
-“Yes, we must be lost!” he murmured. “And if we are, how will we ever
-find our way back to camp?”
-
-“We must find our way back--we simply must!” was Mark’s reply. “The
-river can’t be so very far off.”
-
-“But the canoe is gone. We won’t get that back. It must be miles from
-here by this time,” insisted Frank.
-
-“Well, if it’s gone we’ll have to tramp back, that’s all, Frank. I
-know it’s a long way, and not a very inviting way either, but there is
-nothing else to do.”
-
-The sun was now setting and the blackness of night began to creep
-swiftly over the immense forest. Still further alarmed, they pushed on
-until, without warning, Frank fell headlong and lay like a log. Mark
-raised him up and saw that the hand which had been bitten by the spider
-was swollen to twice its size and that the swelling was beginning to
-creep up the arm.
-
-“He is poisoned, that’s all there is to that,” thought Mark. “Perhaps
-it will kill him.”
-
-The thought of his chum dying there, on his hands, in that lonely
-place, made him frantic. He tore off the handkerchief Frank had placed
-on his hand and brushed the soft mud from the bite. He had heard how
-poison can sometimes be sucked from a wound and now he set to work
-fearlessly, not thinking of himself, but only praying mentally that the
-action would restore Frank to consciousness.
-
-The hours of the night to follow were such that Mark, if he lives a
-hundred years, will never forget. After sucking the bite thoroughly,
-he plastered it with fresh mud and bound it up again. Then, carrying
-Frank to the edge of the pool, he lit a camp-fire, to keep off any
-wild beasts that might be prowling in the vicinity. He bathed his
-chum’s face and raised him up. At first Frank did not respond to
-this treatment but at last he opened his eyes and stared around in
-bewilderment.
-
-“Frank! Frank! wake up!” cried Mark “Please try to rouse yourself.”
-
-“Wha--what happened to me?” was the uncertain question.
-
-“You fell unconscious, don’t you remember? I guess it was the spider
-bite did it. Please rouse up.” And as Frank tried to settle back once
-more Mark shook him vigorously.
-
-It was all of two hours before Frank roused up sufficiently to stand on
-his feet. His eyes were much swollen and he felt sick at his stomach.
-But the poison had now spent its force and from that time on he grew
-gradually better. But the swelling of his hand remained for several
-days.
-
-The night passed without sleep on Mark’s part, for he was afraid to
-leave off watching Frank. To pass the early morning hours, Mark dressed
-one of the curassows, covered it with mud, as he had been taught by
-Cubara, and placed it in the hot ashes of the fire to bake. By the
-time the sun came up the bird was done and to Mark it proved delicious
-eating, although Frank declared he could taste nothing on account of
-the poison still in his system.
-
-“I’m as weak as a rag,” declared the younger boy. “When I stand up my
-legs fairly tremble under me.”
-
-“Then we had better not attempt to do too much to-day,” answered Mark,
-trying to speak cheerfully.
-
-“But we must get back to camp, Mark. What will they think of our
-absence?”
-
-“I’m sure I don’t know. But getting back will not be so easy. Remember,
-we must first locate the river.”
-
-“We ought to be able to do that by the position of the sun.”
-
-“I thought of that. But I’d rather climb up one of these big trees and
-take a look around.”
-
-“All right,--if you can get up.” Frank gazed along the trunk of one of
-the monsters. “It will be no easy task.”
-
-“The vines will aid me,” answered Mark, and made his preparations to
-ascend the tree without further delay.
-
-As Frank had said, it was no easy task, and it was fully quarter of an
-hour before Mark was half way to the top of the giant of the jungle.
-
-“Can you see anything?” called up Frank.
-
-“Not yet, but I am getting on a level with the trees around this one,”
-was the reply. Mark continued to climb. It was now easier work, for at
-the top of the tree the branches were closer together than they were
-below.
-
-“Hurrah! the river!” came the cry. “Frank, we are not so far away from
-it after all.”
-
-“In what direction?” demanded the younger boy.
-
-“To the northward. We have become badly turned around I can tell you.”
-
-“Do you see anything of the camp?”
-
-“No, that is too far off. But if we can only get to the river bank
-we’ll be sure to strike the camp sooner or later,” went on Mark. “I’ll
-come down as soon----”
-
-Mark broke off short, as a peculiar noise just below him caught his
-ear. Looking down he saw a strange looking creature sitting on a
-branch, gazing fiercely at him, a creature covered with black and white
-quills and with a scaly tail that wound itself several times around the
-branch behind it. The animal was a coendoo, commonly called a South
-American porcupine.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXX
-
-IN THE DEPTHS OF THE JUNGLE
-
-
-Ordinarily the South American porcupine or coendoo is a timid animal,
-seeking cover by day and hunting its food during the night. It lives
-upon nuts, roots, herbs and leaves and, unlike other porcupines which
-burrow in the ground, makes its home, to a great extent, in the
-branches and hollows of large trees.
-
-But though usually timid it is at times aroused to great anger,
-especially when startled. Such was now the case with the beast that
-confronted Mark. Every quill, or spine, was raised to its fullest and
-the porcupine emitted a strange hissing whistle which bode the youth no
-good.
-
-Mark was startled, so much so that he slipped from the branch upon
-which he stood and came close to pitching to the ground head first.
-But he caught another branch and with an effort swung himself up to a
-sitting position.
-
-“Are you coming down?” called out Frank.
-
-“I can’t! Here’s a porcupine, or something like it. He looks as if he
-was going to attack me.”
-
-As Mark spoke he felt in his pocket for his pistol and brought the
-weapon forth. It was fully loaded and he pointed it at the coendoo,
-which was now moving slowly backward as though to prepare for a leap
-upon him.
-
-Crack! went the pistol and the porcupine was struck a glancing blow
-over the back. Then it made its leap, landing on Mark’s breast!
-
-For the instant the youth was almost paralyzed with fright. But
-mechanically he discharged his pistol a second time and the bullet
-lodged in the coendoo’s breast. With a howl of pain it fell back,
-caught at the tree branch with its tail and missed it, and went
-plunging out of sight into the foliage and vines below.
-
-“Did you kill it?” called out Frank.
-
-“I don’t know. It fell down. Look out it don’t come on your head,”
-answered Mark.
-
-Frank already had his gun in hand, ready to be of service to his chum
-if possible. But the porcupine failed to appear and he called back that
-it must still be in the foliage of the tree.
-
-With great caution Mark descended one branch after another. Presently
-he caught sight of the animal, hanging from a limb by its tail, an
-appendage which in the coendoo is unusually strong and long. The beast
-was plainly dying but to make certain Mark put another bullet through
-it. Then with the butt of the pistol he unwound the tail and the
-carcass fell to the ground with a thud.
-
-“That was a surprise party I didn’t expect,” said Mark, when he was
-once more beside Frank. “How he scared me when he leaped at me! See,
-his quills drew blood,” and he showed the back of his pricked hand.
-
-“Wonder if the porcupine is good eating?”
-
-“I’ve been told the meat is like that of a suckling pig. We’ll skin
-him and take him along. Who knows but what we may need the meat badly
-before we get out of our mess.”
-
-It was a difficult task to skin the coendoo and it caused them more
-than one wound. But at last it was finished, and with their game
-over their shoulders and their guns in hand, they started out in the
-direction of the stream Mark had located from the tree top.
-
-The day proved an extremely hot one and the boys had not covered
-half the distance when they found they had to sit down and rest. On
-all sides was the trackless jungle: trees, bushes and vines, with
-an occasional opening, where grew the most gorgeous of ferns and
-flowers. Where the ground was damp, monstrous toadstools reared their
-umbrella-like heads and the moss was six to eight inches deep. Insects
-of a hundred varieties were numerous and among them crawled lizards
-and other small creatures for which they could find no name. Orchids
-abounded, some entwining around the trees to a great height. The odor
-was so strong at times as to be positively sickening.
-
-“They say that some of these orchids can put you in a sleep from which
-you will never awaken,” said Mark. “I don’t know if it’s true or not,
-but if we have to sleep in the open another night let us take good care
-to keep away from anything that smells as strong as that plant yonder.”
-
-“I heard the professor tell that one orchid produces vanilla,” said
-Frank. “He said there were over three thousand varieties of the plant.”
-
-Again the forward march was resumed and when both were almost too tired
-to fight their way another step a river came into sight, flowing lazily
-along in the sultry daylight. Both looked at the water for a minute in
-silence then turned to each other in perplexity.
-
-“It doesn’t look like the Orinoco,” declared Frank. “At least, not like
-the part just above the camp.”
-
-“Exactly what I was thinking, Frank. I believe we’ve struck another
-stream entirely.”
-
-“Then we are worse lost than we were before.”
-
-“Perhaps not. This may be a tributary of the Orinoco. If so, by
-following this we are bound to find the Orinoco itself sooner or later.”
-
-“True, but this may flow along for miles before it joins the Orinoco,
-and if it does join that stream, the question is: Does it join above or
-below the camp?”
-
-“I’m sure I can’t answer that question, now. The only thing we can do
-is to follow this stream and trust to luck.”
-
-“If only we had a canoe!”
-
-“True, but we haven’t one, and no tools with which to even make a raft.
-We’ll have to keep on hoofing it, as the saying goes.”
-
-They had brought with them the remains of the baked curassow and on
-this they now proceeded to make a dinner. Both longed for some bread
-and vegetables. They were afraid to touch the berries and other things
-growing around them for fear of being poisoned.
-
-By throwing some brushwood into the stream they soon made certain of
-the direction of the current and this accomplished set off once more,
-after washing down the fowl meat with the coolest drink of water they
-could find. Fortunately the bank of the stream was tolerably clear of
-bushes so they made much more rapid progress than before.
-
-“I have an idea,” said Frank, as they moved around a bend into which a
-mass of driftwood had collected. “Do you see yonder tree trunk, caught
-in the mud? Why can’t we shove that out into the water and take a ride?
-It will rest us, and I think the trunk will move just about as fast as
-we can walk, when once it gets started.”
-
-“I’m willing to try it,” answered Mark, and they set to work to
-dislodge the tree, which looked as if it had been in the water for
-some time. Once loose they sprang “aboard,” as Frank called it, and
-shoved into the stream proper. Caught by the current the tree trunk
-swung along the surface of the watercourse more rapidly than they had
-anticipated.
-
-“This is something like,” cried Frank, seating himself on one of the
-upmost branches. “It’s every bit as good as a canoe.”
-
-“If it don’t take a notion to turn over and dump us into the stream,”
-answered Mark. “It seems to me it’s a little shaky.”
-
-Nevertheless, he, too, was satisfied and sitting side by side they
-allowed the tree to carry them down the river. Soon several miles were
-covered and then they noticed that the watercourse was growing narrower
-and that the current was correspondingly stronger.
-
-“My, but we are flying along now,” remarked Frank.
-
-“Perhaps we had better try to steer the tree into shore,” returned
-Mark. “I don’t like this increase in speed. We may be drifting toward
-some rapids or a waterfall.”
-
-He had hardly spoken when the tree whirled around, almost sending both
-in the water. As they clutched at the branches they felt the speed
-increase. The river was now not more than a quarter of its former width
-and the water foamed up here and there, showing that there were rocks
-not far below the surface. Rocks could also be seen along the shores
-and presently they passed a tall cliff filled with birds, the flock
-swooping off in several directions at their approach.
-
-“I hear water falling ahead!” ejaculated Frank. “Hark!”
-
-“Yes! yes! We are coming to a waterfall!” burst out Mark. “Let us
-try to turn the tree into shore by all means. If we don’t we may be
-drowned!”
-
-Each had a tree branch in his hand, with which he had been trying to
-paddle from time to time. Now both endeavored to use the tree branches
-as rudders, but in a trice Mark’s was caught in some rocks and torn
-from his grasp. A second later the tree bounced up and spun around,
-throwing the boys flat among the branches. Dazed and bewildered they
-clung fast, fearing that the next lurch of the tree would send them
-into the stream, which now foamed and boiled on all sides of them.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXI
-
-HOCKLEY AND THE BOA-CONSTRICTOR
-
-
-“It is high time the boys came back.”
-
-So spoke Professor Strong, on the evening following the departure of
-Frank and Mark up the Orinoco. It was after nine o’clock, and all was
-silent around the camp save for the distant cries of the night birds
-and the howling of the monkeys. The professor stood on the edge of
-the bluff, gazing anxiously through the gloom that overhung the broad
-watercourse.
-
-“It is odd they are not back,” said Darry, who was close at hand. “I
-hope no harm has befallen them.”
-
-Hockley had already thrown himself down in the tent and was fast
-asleep, despite a plague of gnats which had but recently put in an
-appearance. Sam sat by the fire sewing up a hole he had torn in his
-jacket. The Indian was at the water’s edge, fishing with a net he had
-made of braided vines.
-
-As the time slipped by Professor Strong, Darry and Sam grew more
-anxious and none of them felt like going to sleep. The Indian came in
-and threw himself down and then the others sat down to talk in whispers.
-
-By daybreak the professor had made up his mind to go after the missing
-ones. He decided to take Cubara with him, leaving the others to watch
-the camp.
-
-“If I find the boys I’ll be back before dinner time,” said Professor
-Strong. “If not, I won’t return until they are found.”
-
-“Well, I’m sure I hope you have quick luck,” said Sam. “We’ll be very
-anxious until you return.”
-
-Soon the professor and the Indian were out of sight and the boys
-turned back to put the camp in order. Hockley threw himself on a rock,
-declining to take a hand in the work.
-
-“You ought to do your share,” said Sam. “It’s not fair to expect us to
-do everything.”
-
-“You shut up!” cried Hockley. “I’ll do as I please. If you say a word
-I’ll pitch into you!”
-
-He was in an ill humor and spoiling for a fight, as Darry and Sam could
-readily see. Yet Sam was not daunted.
-
-“It’s not fair, Hockley. Everybody ought to do his share of the work,”
-he went on.
-
-“Oh, leave him alone, Beans,” came from Darry. “We can’t stop him from
-being lazy.”
-
-The words had scarcely been uttered when the angry youth, caught up a
-billet of wood and flung it at Darry. It struck the lad in the shoulder
-hurting him not a little. Darry rushed at him, but leaping up with a
-club in his hands, Hockley stood on guard.
-
-“Leave me alone!” he exclaimed. “The first of you to get too close will
-get a crack with this.”
-
-“Let us both pitch into him,” came from Sam. “He ought to have a
-first-class thrashing.”
-
-“You let me alone!” howled Hockley. “Don’t you dare to touch me!”
-
-“Drop that club,” came from Darry. “Drop it, I say, or Sam and I will
-certainly pitch into you and you’ll get more than you want.”
-
-“I--I won’t drop the club until you promise to let me alone.”
-
-“Why did you fling that piece of wood at me?”
-
-“You hadn’t any right to jaw at me.”
-
-“It was your business to do your share of the work here.”
-
-A war of words followed, and in the end Hockley dropped the club and
-consented to do some of the work. As soon as it was finished, he
-picked up his gun and started to move off.
-
-“Where are you going?” demanded Darry. “The professor told us to remain
-here until he got back.”
-
-“I’m going down the river a bit. I reckon there’s no harm in that,”
-answered Hockley and without waiting for further argument he strode
-away and was soon lost to sight in the jungle.
-
-“He wouldn’t go off like that if he wasn’t boiling mad,” observed Sam.
-
-After cleaning up the two boys started in to fish, there being nothing
-else by which to while away the time. But biting was not lively, and
-after half an hour of only fair success they walked up the bluff again.
-They had just reached the tent when they heard a gunshot, followed by a
-yell of fright.
-
-“That’s Hockley!” ejaculated Darry. “He has stirred up something and it
-has scared him to death.”
-
-“Help! help!” came faintly to their ears. “Help!”
-
-“We had better go and see what is the matter,” said Sam, and caught up
-a rifle. Darry had already reached for a shotgun, and thus armed both
-boys sped down the bluff again and in the direction from whence the
-cries proceeded.
-
-They had not far to go. Beyond the bend of the stream was an inlet
-and back of this a somewhat open glade, bordered by half a dozen
-low-drooping rubber trees. Among these trees stood Hockley, fairly
-paralyzed with terror and close at hand, swinging from a branch, was a
-boa-constrictor all of fifteen feet in length.
-
-[Illustration: “Help! save me!” screamed the unfortunate youth.]
-
-“Oh, what a snake!” burst out Darry, and then stood still, hardly
-knowing whether to proceed or not.
-
-Sam said nothing, but brought his rifle to his shoulder, took quick aim
-and pulled the trigger. The bullet sped true and buried itself in the
-boa-constrictor’s neck.
-
-The shot awakened Darry to action and now he too blazed away, peppering
-the big snake in the head and body. The second shot from his gun was
-at close range and fairly tore a piece of skin from the huge reptile’s
-neck.
-
-But a boa-constrictor is not easily killed, and though badly wounded it
-yet had a great deal of fight in it. Still holding to the tree branch
-with its tail it shot forth its body and in an instant had Hockley by
-the waist.
-
-“Help! save me!” screamed the unfortunate youth. “Oh, please save me!
-Don’t let him crush me to pieces!”
-
-In an agony of fear he tried to pull himself loose, but without avail.
-The snake lifted him up from the ground with ease, intending doubtless
-to crush him to a jelly on the tree trunk.
-
-But now Sam rushed as close as had Darry. The rifle was a repeating
-weapon--one of the best the party possessed--and shoving it at the
-snake’s head the youth let drive twice in quick succession. Then,
-without waiting to see the effect of these shots, he put two additional
-bullets in the boa-constrictor’s body. The reptile quivered from head
-to tail then remained motionless.
-
-It was an anxious moment and the hearts of all three boys seemed
-to stop beating. Hockley tried to call out, but could not, for the
-boa-constrictor was fairly crushing in his ribs.
-
-But after that moment had passed the boys saw that they had won the
-battle. The head of the boa-constrictor dropped and the muscles of the
-huge body relaxed. Then Hockley slipped to the damp earth and slowly
-the reptile’s body dropped on top of him.
-
-“He must be dead,” whispered Darry, hoarsely, and with his gun started
-to release Hockley from the loathsome weight. Sam assisted, and soon
-they had him free and was dragging him out of harm’s way. From a safe
-distance they watched the boa-constrictor and at last felt certain that
-it was dead.
-
-“He’s in a bad way,” said Sam, leaning over Hockley. The youth lay in a
-heap, totally unconscious and breathing with difficulty.
-
-“It was awful,” returned Darry. “What a close shave! Let us take him
-down to the river and bathe his face.”
-
-They did as suggested, but even this failed to revive Hockley. Then
-Darry ran back to the camp for some medicine which was administered
-with care. But it was fully an hour before Hockley opened his eyes.
-
-“Take him off!” he moaned. “Take the horrible thing off!”
-
-“You’re safe now, Hockley,” said Darry, kindly. “The boa-constrictor
-is dead.” But Hockley was now out of his mind and did not understand,
-and he continued to plead most piteously that they save him from being
-crushed to death.
-
-“We’ll have to carry him back to camp,” said Sam, and this was done. It
-was no easy task to get the hurt one up the bluff. Once in camp they
-fixed Hockley a soft bed and did all they could to make him otherwise
-comfortable.
-
-“I never want to see another boa-constrictor, not even in a menagerie,”
-declared Sam. “I’ll dream of that thing for a week.”
-
-The boys remained in camp after that. It was nightfall before Hockley
-came to his senses and then he complained of a severe pain in the
-chest. They uncovered him and rubbed him down with liniment.
-
-“Is it dead?” he asked. “How did you kill it?” And when they told him
-he shook his head slowly, as if in wonder. Later on he called them both
-to him. “I’m much obliged for what you did,” he said humbly. “It was
-great. I shan’t forget it. I’m sorry we had the row.”
-
-“So am I sorry,” returned Sam, and Darry nodded to show he agreed. “We
-can’t afford to quarrel out here, Jake. We may need each other’s help,
-eh?”
-
-“That’s just what I was thinking. I guess I was a big fool to start it
-anyway. Let’s call it off, will you?”
-
-“Certainly!” cried Darry.
-
-“With all my heart,” came from Sam.
-
-Hockley took the hand of each and pressed it briefly. He looked one and
-the other in the eyes and then his gaze dropped. “All right, we’ll be
-friends,” he said, in a lower voice than ever.
-
-Nobody felt like talking after this. Darry started up the fire and got
-out some things for dinner. Sam brought up the fish and cleaned them.
-Hockley turned over on his back and dozed away, occasionally uttering
-a low groan. Yet every one of the lads felt better because of what had
-just passed.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXII
-
-A PEEP AT GOLD AND SILVER MINES
-
-
-“The tree is caught fast!”
-
-“I know it, Frank, but I don’t think it will stay caught for long!”
-
-What the two chums said was true--the tree had caught in the boiling
-and foaming water, directly in the middle of the stream. The spray
-was flying all about them, so that they could scarcely make out what
-was ahead. But they heard a noise that could mean but one thing. A
-waterfall was there, dashing with a roar over the rocks and falling
-into a big pool below.
-
-A minute went by. The tree was swinging around slowly. Now it began to
-grate along the rocks. Of a sudden an end bobbed up and then the tree
-was free, and on it rushed for the waterfall.
-
-“We are going over!” shrieked Frank, and held fast, not knowing exactly
-why. Mark tried to answer, but the roar all around them drowned out
-every other sound.
-
-On they went for a hundred yards, between rocks standing up higher than
-their heads. Then the brink of the waterfall was gained and here the
-tree seemed to pause for a moment. Over it went, carrying the boys with
-it, over and down, out of the sunlight into utter darkness.
-
-By instinct more than reason both boys clung fast to the tree and that
-was their salvation. Down they went into the pool and the torrent of
-water came on top of them, sending them far beneath the surface. How
-long they remained under they could not tell, afterward, but it seemed
-an age. When they came up each was more dead than alive. But still they
-clung to the tree as it drifted away and lodged among the rocks a short
-distance further down the river.
-
-“Frank, are you all right?” Mark asked the question, feebly, some ten
-minutes later.
-
-“I--I guess so,” was the gasped out answer. “But, oh, Mark, wasn’t it
-an awful tumble?”
-
-“That’s what it was, Frank. I didn’t think we’d come out of it alive.”
-
-They left the tree and sat down on the rocks, and there rested for over
-an hour. The noise of the waterfall still thundered in their ears, but
-otherwise all was silent.
-
-At last Mark arose and stretched himself. “If we are all right we may
-as well go on again,” he said.
-
-“On the tree?”
-
-“Yes. I don’t think there is any danger of another waterfall--at least
-not close by. We can watch the water and if the current gets too swift
-we can turn into shore before the tree gets beyond our control again.”
-
-So it was agreed, and soon they were on the way once more. Below the
-falls the river was narrow for several miles but the current was not
-very swift, for much of the water was carried off by side streams
-flowing in various directions.
-
-“We don’t seem to be getting to the Orinoco very fast,” observed Frank,
-after all of five miles had been covered. “I’ll wager we are at least
-twenty to thirty miles from camp.”
-
-“Perhaps we are. But what do you advise? We can’t sit down here and
-suck our thumbs.”
-
-“Hark! What was that? A gunshot?”
-
-“It sounded more like a distant explosion,” cried Mark, leaping to
-his feet. “There it goes again. An explosion sure enough. What can it
-mean?”
-
-“I think I know,” answered Frank. “It means that we are near some kind
-of a mine. That was the blasting of rocks.”
-
-“I hope you are right, Frank. It came from down the river, didn’t it?”
-
-“It did. Let us go on. There may be a regular miners’ camp below here.”
-
-Once more they allowed their improvised craft to drift down the stream.
-The character of the country was changing, and presently they found
-themselves hemmed in by high rocky walls. Then came a bend eastward and
-they came in sight of a small settlement. There were a dozen houses
-built of timber covered with corrugated iron, and a small engine house
-with a tall iron smokestack. Back of the settlement were the openings
-to several gold and silver mines. As they approached another explosion
-rent the air and they saw a large section of a cliff give way and fall
-to the rocks below.
-
-There were several boats tied up to a tiny dock running along the
-river, and the men on these gazed curiously at the boys as they drifted
-up and leaped aboard one of the craft.
-
-“Where come you from?” demanded one of the men, in Spanish.
-
-“We are American,” said Mark. “Can you speak English?”
-
-“Americans, eh?” put in another man. “I’m an American myself. How did
-you get on that tree?”
-
-“It’s a long story,” answered Mark. “We were with a party along the
-Orinoco but we went ashore and got lost. Are we far from that river?”
-
-“Eight miles. You look pretty wet.”
-
-“We came over the falls.”
-
-“Gee whiz! It’s a wonder you are alive!” burst out the American, whose
-name was Simon Smither. “Come ashore, and I’ll take you to the boss.
-This place is Castroville. Maybe you’ve heard of it. We have here the
-Little Bolivar and the Moonlight Mines, two of the best payers in this
-section of the country.”
-
-“Castroville!” ejaculated Frank. He remembered that Andy Hume had once
-mentioned the place to him. “Is there a newcomer here by the name of
-Andy Hume?”
-
-“There is. He’s up to the office now. So you know him?”
-
-“We do,” answered Mark, and then told their story while the whole party
-hurried from the river to where the offices of the mines were located,
-not far from the engine house.
-
-Andy Hume saw them coming and leaped up from a stool to receive them.
-“I declare,” he cried. “Where did you come from? Thought you were
-hunting and fishing along the Orinoco.”
-
-“We were,” answered Frank, and told of how they had become lost and of
-what had followed. “We must get back as soon as we can,” he added. “The
-professor and the others will be much worried over our absence.”
-
-The matter was talked over, and by consulting one of the managers of
-the mines they obtained permission to use one of the boats, taking
-with them a native boatman who knew all the rivers of the vicinity
-thoroughly.
-
-“He’ll get you back safe and sound,” said Andy Hume. “He’s a first rate
-fellow. He brought me here from Navaleno, forty miles away.”
-
-“But how did you happen to come here?” questioned Mark. “I thought you
-were going prospecting?”
-
-“So I was, but at Navaleno I met an old miner friend of mine, Captain
-Richards. He has an interest here and he wants me to look after it
-while he takes a trip to the States. So I’m booked here at a salary of
-two hundred dollars per month and found. Not so bad that, eh?” And the
-boys agreed that the arrangement was certainly very promising.
-
-A comfortable meal and a chance to dry their clothing made both boys
-feel much better. While they were eating they asked a number of
-questions about the mines and when they had finished Andy Hume insisted
-upon showing them around.
-
-“The output of these mines will be about six hundred thousand dollars
-this year,” he said. “To get out the gold and silver will cost the
-combined companies about two hundred thousand dollars, leaving a profit
-to the stockholders of four hundred thousand dollars. We have here all
-the latest machinery with the exception of a newly-patented quartz
-crusher which is now being built for us in the United States. At first
-the mining around here was what is commonly called cradling or placer
-mining,--that is, the miners would pick up what they could find on the
-surface or by ordinary digging--but that is past and all we get has to
-be blasted out of the mountains.”
-
-An hour was spent in and around the mines, inspecting the shafts and
-the various machines for extracting the gold and silver. Then the
-boatman came up to announce that the boat was ready and they started to
-leave.
-
-As they did so a strange boat, containing several passengers, arrived
-at the dock close at hand. As the passengers came toward where Frank
-and Mark were standing, the latter plucked the former hurriedly by the
-sleeve.
-
-“See there, Frank,” he whispered.
-
-Frank looked in the direction and gave a start.
-
-“Why it’s that Dan Markel, the fellow who robbed Hockley!” he
-ejaculated.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXIII
-
-TOGETHER AGAIN--CONCLUSION
-
-
-The two boys were much surprised by the unexpected appearance of the
-man from Baltimore and for the moment knew not what to say or do.
-
-“Do you know one of those men?” asked Andy Hume.
-
-“Yes, that one,” answered Mark, pointing out the wrong-doer. “His name
-is Dan Markel, and he robbed Jacob Hockley of his watch and nearly all
-of his money.”
-
-“You don’t say! Then he won’t be the fellow we want here.”
-
-By this time Markel was close at hand. Now for the first time he caught
-sight of the boys and he halted in dismay.
-
-“So we’ve met again,” said Mark, coldly.
-
-“Why--er--how are you?” stammered the man from Baltimore. He knew not
-what to say.
-
-“I suppose you’ve got Jake Hockley’s watch with you,” put in Frank.
-“If you have, you had better pass it over to us.”
-
-“You--er--you talk in riddles,” returned Markel. “I know nothing of his
-watch excepting that it was taken from him while in a crowd.”
-
-“You took the watch yourself, Mr. Markel,” put in Mark, boldly. “And
-what is more, you sent for his valise and robbed that. It is utterly
-useless for you to deny it. If there is any officer in this settlement
-I shall have you arrested.”
-
-At this the man from Baltimore turned pale. He started as if to run
-away, then saw how hopeless such a move would be and held his ground.
-
-The talk had attracted a crowd, which included the general manager of
-the mining settlement, Mr. John Brisbam. He now demanded to know what
-it meant, and, with many interruptions from Markel, Mark and Frank told
-of the Hockley affair and of what had occurred at Macuto.
-
-“We can prove all we say, if you’ll only give us a little time,” added
-Mark. “As soon as I can find my friends again I’ll bring them here. In
-the meantime I would like this man placed under arrest.”
-
-“Arrest! Not much!” howled Dan Markel. “It--it’s an outrage! I am an
-honest American citizen and I demand protection. There is a great
-mistake. I am not the person they are after.”
-
-“Do you mind being searched?” asked Andy Hume, shrewdly.
-
-“You have no right to touch me!” returned the man from Baltimore in
-increased alarm.
-
-A war of words, which nearly came to blows followed, but in the end Dan
-Markel was marched into one of the offices of the mining company. Here
-his pockets were examined and from one was taken Hockley’s watch.
-
-“There are Hockley’s initials,” said Mark, pointing them out. “J. A. H.
-don’t stand for Daniel Markel.”
-
-“That’s right they don’t,” came from Andy Hume. “He’s a black sheep
-sure as you’re born. All this money must belong to Hockley, too,” he
-added, counting up a quantity of gold and silver amounting to nearly
-three hundred dollars. The balance of the funds had already been
-squandered by the man from Baltimore.
-
-Dan Markel raved and even swore at the treatment he received, and in
-the end he was handcuffed. The watch and money were placed in Mr.
-Brisbam’s hands for safe keeping, and the prisoner was marched to one
-of the houses and a guard set, in order that he might not escape.
-
-A little later Mark and Frank set off with the native boatman for the
-camp on the Orinoco. It was already growing dark, but the native knew
-the course well, so there was no danger of going astray.
-
-“I see the camp-fire!” cried Frank, when they were yet half a mile off.
-“How good it looks! Almost like home!”
-
-“I feel as if we had been away an age,” returned Mark. “I can tell you
-I don’t want to get lost again.”
-
-“You are right, Mark; the very word is enough to give one the shivers.”
-
-As they drew closer they set up a loud shout, which was presently
-answered by Sam and Darry, who came rushing down to the water’s edge to
-receive them.
-
-“We had almost given you up,” said Darry. “Where in the world have you
-been?”
-
-“We’ve been further than we intended to go,” answered Mark. “Where is
-the professor and the others?”
-
-“The professor and Cubara are out looking for you. Hockley is in the
-tent. He fell in with a boa-constrictor and the snake nearly crushed
-him to death.”
-
-“We’ve got news for him--news he’ll be glad to hear,” said Frank.
-
-All walked up the bluff to the camp-fire and there each told his story.
-In the midst of the recitals Hockley roused up. He could scarcely
-believe his ears when listening to what Mark and Frank had to tell
-concerning Dan Markel.
-
-“I’m glad you collared him,” he said, faintly. “I didn’t mind the money
-so much, but I hated to part with the watch. What will you do next? I
-can’t go over to that mining camp yet. I’m too sore.”
-
-“We’ll see what the professor says,” said Mark.
-
-The professor and the Indian came in a short while later. They had been
-up and down the river for miles and were thoroughly disheartened. When
-Professor Strong saw Frank and Mark he was overjoyed and could scarcely
-keep from hugging them.
-
-“I was so afraid you had met your death in the jungle I knew not what
-to do,” he said. “I did not sleep a wink last night. We picked up your
-trail twice and lost it. We found the canoe and that led me to think
-that perhaps you were drowned.”
-
-“We have had adventures enough to last us a year,” returned Mark. “I
-can tell you a life in the jungle is all well enough to read about, but
-in reality it isn’t half so pleasant as one imagines.”
-
-It was arranged that all hands should move to the mining settlement the
-next afternoon, starting after the sun had spent its force for the day.
-Hockley was to be made comfortable in Cubara’s recovered canoe, with
-the professor to wait on him, while the other boys made the passage in
-the craft brought from Castroville.
-
-The next morning was a busy one, for there were many things to pack up.
-Sam, Darry, Mark and Frank went out for a last hunt, taking Cubara with
-them. They brought in several peccaries and a score of birds, including
-two beautiful Venezuelan trumpeters, which they had found wading in a
-pool half a mile distant from the Orinoco.
-
-“This ends our outing tour in Venezuela I suppose,” said Frank. “Well,
-I am not sorry. We have still a good deal of ground to cover and we
-can’t afford to spend too much time in one place.”
-
-Four o’clock of the next day saw them embarking at the foot of the
-bluff. They had carried Hockley to the canoe and now the disabled youth
-was placed on a grassy cushion which would add to the comfort of the
-boat ride.
-
-“Good-bye to the camp!” cried Darry, as the boats left the shore. “More
-than likely we’ll never see the place again. Good-bye!” And the others
-echoed the words. Soon the turn in the river hid the locality from
-their view.
-
- * * * * *
-
-A few words more and we will bring to a close this story of sight
-seeing and adventures in Venezuela.
-
-When our friends reached Castroville a surprise awaited them. Despite
-the guard which had been set, Dan Markel had escaped through the night,
-stolen one of the small boats on the river, and departed for parts
-unknown. A search lasting two hours had been instituted but had proved
-of no avail.
-
-“We followed him down the stream to where there are several forks,”
-said Andy Hume. “He took to one of them, but which one we don’t know.”
-
-“But he didn’t take any of my stuff with him, did he?” was Hockley’s
-anxious question.
-
-“No, he escaped with nothing but his clothing and a pistol he stole
-from his guard.”
-
-“Then let him go,” returned the lank youth. “I never want to see him
-again.”
-
-“I think myself it is just as well,” said Professor Strong. “To
-prosecute him would put us to a great deal of trouble. If he hasn’t a
-cent he will have a hard enough time of it getting along down here.”
-
-“Right you are,” said Andy Hume. “I’ll wager he’ll bitterly regret that
-he ever left the States.”
-
-When Hockley received his things back he wished to reward Frank and
-Mark for what they had done, but the two boys would not listen to this.
-Then he said that he was very grateful and hoped that they should be
-friends in the future.
-
-“I’ve made up with Darry and Beans,” he said to Frank and Mark. “And I
-want to make up with you, too.”
-
-“All right, it suits me!” answered Frank, readily, and Mark also
-agreed, and they shook hands.
-
-There was an empty house in the mining settlement and this was turned
-over to our friends temporarily, and here Hockley rested until he
-felt once more like himself. During this time the other boys made a
-number of trips up into the mountains, viewing other mines of lesser
-importance. Thus several weeks slipped by.
-
-“All told we’ve had some pretty good times here,” declared Mark to the
-other boys, one day. “I hope we have as good in our future travels.”
-His wish was fulfilled, and how will be related in another volume of
-this series.
-
-In this tale we will not only meet all of our friends again, but also
-Dan Markel and learn something of what became of the fellow after he
-left Castroville, and of how he plotted fresh trouble for those who had
-exposed him.
-
-And now for the present let us bid Professor Strong and our young
-friends adieu. We have followed them in an interesting trip from one
-end of Venezuela to the other, have visited the capital and other
-important cities, and have gone with them up the Orinoco and into the
-jungle. Our friends have had numerous adventures and have been in
-several positions of more or less peril. But all has turned out well,
-and here we will say good-bye.
-
-
-
-
-WAR AND ADVENTURE STORIES.
-
-By EDWARD STRATEMEYER.
-
-_Author of the Famous “Old Glory Series,” “Bound to Succeed Series,”
-“Ship and Shore Series,” etc._
-
-
-FIRST VOLUME.
-
- =BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON Or Two Boys’ Adventures in South Africa.=
-
- Illustrated by A. B. SHUTE.
-
- Cloth. 354 pages. Price, $1.25.
-
-“The story bristles with action.”--_The Outlook._
-
-“A stirring story of the South African war.”--_The Journal_,
-Indianapolis, Ind.
-
-“The kind of story to please boys and give them a fair idea of a great
-historical event.”--_St. Louis Post-Despatch._
-
-“Throughout the book there is evidence of that sympathy for the Boer
-which prevails on this side of the Atlantic.”--_Chronicle_, Chicago.
-
-
-SECOND VOLUME.
-
- =ON TO PEKIN Or Old Glory in China.=
-
- Illustrated by A. B. SHUTE.
-
- Cloth. 330 pages. Price, $1.25.
-
-“Parents can feel, in putting this book into the hands of boys and
-girls, that they are going to get and hold the interest by the
-strenuous adventure, and at the same time enforce those splendid
-old-fashioned traits of honesty, courage, and true all-round
-manliness.”--_Universalist Leader._
-
-“A thoroughly up-to-date book, full of incidents familiar to us, which
-will suit the boys as well as be of interest to their parents.”--_San
-Francisco Call._
-
-
-
-
-AMERICAN BOYS’ BIOGRAPHICAL SERIES
-
-By EDWARD STRATEMEYER
-
-
- =AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY.= Illustrated by A. B.
- SHUTE, and from photographs.
-
- Cloth. 320 pages. Price $1.25.
-
-No more timely or patriotic book can be found than Mr. Stratemeyer’s
-biography of our late martyred President.
-
- _Another volume in preparation._
-
-
-
-
-COLONIAL SERIES
-
-By EDWARD STRATEMEYER
-
- =WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST=; Or, A Soldier Boy’s Battles in the
- Wilderness.
-
- Cloth. Illustrated. Price $1.25.
-
-“A thoroughly entertaining book.”--_N.Y. World._
-
-
- =MARCHING ON NIAGARA=; Or, The Soldier Boy of the Old Frontier. (_In
- press._)
-
-
-
-
-THE FAMOUS “OLD GLORY SERIES.”
-
-By EDWARD STRATEMEYER,
-
-_Author of “The Bound to Succeed Series,” “The Ship and Shore Series,”
-etc._
-
- Six volumes. Cloth. Illustrated.
-
- Price per volume, $1.25.
-
-
- =UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA Or the War Fortunes of a Castaway.=
-
- =A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA Or Fighting for the Single Star.=
-
- =FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS Or Under Schley on the Brooklyn.=
-
- =UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES Or a Young Officer in the Tropics.=
-
- =THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE Or Under Lawton through Luzon.=
-
- =UNDER MacARTHUR IN LUZON Or the Last Battle in the Philippines.=
-
-“A boy once addicted to Stratemeyer stays by him.”--_The Living Church._
-
-“The boys’ delight--the ‘Old Glory Series.’”--_The Christian Advocate_,
-New York.
-
-“Stratemeyer’s style suits the boys.”--JOHN TERHUNE, _Supt. of Public
-Instruction_, Bergen Co., New Jersey.
-
-“Mr. Stratemeyer is in a class by himself when it comes to
-writing about American heroes, their brilliant doings on land and
-sea.”--_Times_, Boston.
-
-“Mr. Stratemeyer has written a series of books which, while
-historically correct and embodying the most important features of
-the Spanish-American War and the rebellion of the Filipinos, are
-sufficiently interwoven with fiction to render them most entertaining
-to young readers.”--_The Call_, San Francisco.
-
-
-
-
-THE BOUND TO SUCCEED SERIES
-
-By EDWARD STRATEMEYER,
-
-_Author of “Under Dewey at Manila,” etc._
-
- Three Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume, $1.00.
-
-
- =RICHARD DARE’S VENTURE Or Striking Out for Himself.=
-
- =OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH Or The Mystery of a Mine.=
-
- =TO ALASKA FOR GOLD Or The Fortune Hunters of the Yukon.=
-
-
-PRESS OPINIONS OF EDWARD STRATEMEYER’S BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE.
-
-“In ‘Richard Dare’s Venture,’ Edward Stratemeyer has fully sustained
-his reputation as an entertaining, helpful, and instructive writer for
-boys.”--_Philadelphia Call._
-
-“‘Richard Dare’s Venture,’ by Edward Stratemeyer, tells the story
-of a country lad who goes to New York to earn enough to support his
-widowed mother and orphaned sisters. Richard’s energy, uprightness of
-character, and good sense carry him through some trying experiences,
-and gain him friends.”--_The Churchman_, New York.
-
-“A breezy boy’s book is ‘Oliver Bright’s Search.’ The author has a
-direct, graphic style, and every healthy minded youth will enjoy the
-volume.”--_N. Y. Commercial Advertiser._
-
-“‘Richard Dare’s Venture’ is a fresh, wholesome book to put into a
-boy’s hands.”--_St. Louis Post Dispatch._
-
-“‘Richard Dare’s Venture’ is a wholesome story of a practical boy who
-made a way for himself when thrown upon his own resources.”--_Christian
-Advocate._
-
-“It is such books as ‘Richard Dare’s Venture’ that are calculated
-to inspire young readers with a determination to succeed in life,
-and to choose some honorable walk in which to find that success. The
-author, Edward Stratemeyer, has shown a judgment that is altogether
-too rare in the makers of books for boys, in that he has avoided that
-sort of heroics in the picturing of the life of his hero which deals
-in adventures of the daredevil sort. In that respect alone the book
-commends itself to the favor of parents who have a regard for the
-education of their sons, but the story is sufficiently enlivening
-and often thrilling to satisfy the healthful desires of the young
-reader.”--_Kansas City Star._
-
-“Of standard writers of boys’ stories there is quite a list, but those
-who have not read any by Edward Stratemeyer have missed a very goodly
-thing.”--_Boston Ideas._
-
-_For sale by all booksellers, or will be sent, postpaid, on receipt of
-price by_
-
-
- LEE & SHEPARD, Publishers,
- BOSTON.
-
-
-
-
-TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:
-
-
- Italicized text is surrounded by underscores: _italics_.
-
- Emboldened text is surrounded by equals signs: =bold=.
-
- Obvious typographical errors have been corrected.
-
- Inconsistencies in hyphenation have been standardized.
-
- Archaic or variant spelling has been retained.
-
- Incorrect page numbers in the Table of Contents and List of
- Illustrations have been corrected.
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LOST ON THE ORINOCO ***
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
-United States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that:
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without
-widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.